Sunteți pe pagina 1din 364

R

OWNER’S HANDBOOK

Publication Part No. LRL 18 02 54 602

© Land Rover 2005


L

Introduction
Congratulations on acquiring your new Land Rover vehicle. We trust that you will enjoy many years
of safe, dependable driving.
This handbook forms part of the Owner literature supplied with your new vehicle. The first section is
a Quick Start area, designed to aid the initial driver set up and explain some of the unique features.
Please take the time to familiarise yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating
instructions before you drive. The more that you understand about your new vehicle, the greater the
safety, economy and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
To include vehicle design changes made after this handbook was printed, it may have been necessary
to issue a handbook supplement. Any supplements will be stored in the literature pack. If further
updates are required, they will be posted on the Land Rover internet site and can be accessed at;
www.ownerinfo.landrover.com.
Remember to pass on the Owner Literature when reselling the vehicle. It forms an integral part of
the whole vehicle package and will help to familiarise the next owner with this vehicle.
This handbook covers all current versions of the Range Rover Sport and, together with the other
books in your literature pack, provides all the information that you need to derive maximum pleasure
from owning and driving your new vehicle.
Important
The information contained in this handbook covers all vehicle derivatives and optional equipment.
Some of the options may not be fitted to your vehicle, unless they formed part of the original vehicle
specification. Therefore, some parts of this handbook may not apply to your vehicle. Furthermore,
due to printing cycles, it may include descriptions of options before they become generally available.

We operate a policy of constant product improvement and therefore reserve the right to change
specifications, without notice, at any time. While every effort is made to ensure complete accuracy
of the information in this handbook, no liabilities for inaccuracies, or the consequences thereof, can
be accepted by the manufacturer or Dealer, except in respect of personal injury caused by the
negligence of the manufacturer or Dealer.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted in any form, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or other means, without
prior written permission from Land Rover Customer Services.

2
R

Handbook Contents
Quick Start Driving and Operating
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Starting and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Gas Station Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Fuel and Refuelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
General Information Park Distance Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Transfer Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Controls and Instruments
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . 168
Keys and Remote Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Locks and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Dynamic Stability and Traction Control . . 180
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Air Suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Airbag SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Terrain Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Door Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Towing Eyes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Facia Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Load Carrying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Front Lighting Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Settings Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Maintenance
Warning Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Audible Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Hood Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Lamps and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Under-hood Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Engine Oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Electric Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Heating and Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Power Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Interior Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Loadspace Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
In-Car Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Land Rover Homelink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Tire Pressure Monitoring System. . . . . . . 249
Cleaning and Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Identification Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

3
L

Handbook Contents
Roadside Emergency
Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Technical Data
Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Engines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Audio System
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Care of Compact Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Controls and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Auxiliary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Audio Voice Recognition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Radio Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
CD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Rear Seat Entertainment Commands . . . . 351

4
R

Quick Start
Quick Start
THE REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
EMERGENCY UNLOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
FACIA CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
WARNING INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
LAMPS MASTER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
CONFIGURABLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . .12
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
INTERLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
PARKBRAKE (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . .14
AUTOMATIC MIRROR DIPPING . . . . . . . . .15
RESONANCE WITH LOWERED WINDOWS .15
OCCUPANT DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
GENERAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
RADIO OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
CD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
VOICE RECOGNITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Gas Station Information


FUEL FILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
TIRE PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
OPENING THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

5
L

6
R

Quick Start
Quick Start

THE REMOTE CONTROL EMERGENCY UNLOCKING

H5910G

1. Key release button. Press to release the


folded key.
2. Lock button. Locks all doors and activates
perimetric alarm. See Perimetric alarm,
33.
H5946G
3. Unlock button. Press once to disarm all
alarm features and unlock driver’s door If the remote control should fail there is an
only. Press twice to open all doors. emergency access feature on the left-hand front
door lock. With the key inserted into the slot
Note: The above applies unless configured
beneath the handle cap, the cap can be pulled
for multi-point entry.
outwards slightly and then moved backwards to
4. Land Rover button. The remote control can unhook it. The key can now be used to unlock
be programmed to initiate one of 5 the vehicle. For a full description of this feature,
features; Panic alarm, Headlamp courtesy see Emergency locking/unlocking, 35.
delay Tailgate release, Tailglass release or
Air suspension control. For a full
description of how to programme this
button, see LAND ROVER BUTTON, 28.
Partial arming
If the driver’s door is not fully closed when the
remote control lock button is pressed the
vehicle horn will activate. Until the door is fully
closed the vehicle will remain unlocked and
unprotected by the alarm system.

7
L

Quick Start
FACIA CONTROLS

1 2 3 4 5

AUTO

1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

10 9 8

H5913N

1. High/low beam and direction/turn indicator 6. Display screen


controls 7. Electric parkbrake switch
2. Wiper and washer control 8. Starter switch
3. Audio/display controls 9. Cruise control switches
4. Hazard warning lamp switch 10. Lamps master switch
5. Heater/air conditioning controls For a full description of facia controls and their
functions, see FACIA CONTROLS, 72.

8
R

Quick Start
WARNING INDICATORS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

H6584N

1. Dynamic Response (RED) 6. Brakes (RED) (Canada only)


2. Battery charging (RED) 7. Brakes (RED) (U.S. only)
3. Low oil pressure (RED) 8. Parkbrake (RED) (U.S. only)
4. Seat belts (RED) 9. Parkbrake (RED) (Canada only)
5. Airbag SRS (RED) If one of these red warning indicators
illuminates, a serious fault is indicated. Stop the
vehicle and refer to the main section of this
handbook.
For a full description of warning indicators and
their functions, see INDICATOR GROUPING,
93.

9
L

Quick Start
LAMPS MASTER SWITCH

AUTO

AUTO

5 6 7
H6075G

2 3 The detent positions are:


1
4 5. Off
6. Front fog lamps
AUTO
7. Front and Rear fog lamps
For a full description of these functions, see
EXTERIOR LAMPS, 99.
Headlamp courtesy delay
When you leave the vehicle in a darkened
situation you can set the headlamps to remain
H5934L
on for a while.
1. Off With the master switch in positions 2, 3 or 4,
2. Side lamps turn the starter switch off and remove the key.
Turn the master switch to the off position. The
3. Low beam headlamps
headlamps will remain on for up to 240
4. Automatic control lamps seconds. For a full description of this feature
and how to set the time delay, see Headlamp
courtesy delay, 101.

10
R

Quick Start
WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield washer control

1
0

4
H5939G

H5937G Rear window wash/wipe

1. Rain sensor variable delay


2. Normal speed wipe
3. Fast speed wipe
4. Single wipe
Rain sensor variable delay

H5940G

For more detailed information on the wash/wipe


system, see WINDSHIELD WIPERS, 103.

H5938G

With the lever in position 1, rotate the switch to


vary the sensitivity/delay between wipes.

11
L

Quick Start
CONFIGURABLE FEATURES
Settings options (trip computer)
These are displayed on the main message center. See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 77.

SETTINGS CHOICE
TRIP DISTANCE UNITS (odometer) MILES/KM
FUEL USAGE UNITS MPG
l/100km
Km/l
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE oC or oF

OVERSPEED WARNING Off


(Set a personal speed limit - Warnings are 20 - 250 km/h or 15 - 140 mph in 5-unit steps
displayed in the message center) (Units set as trip distance)
HEADLAMP OFF DELAY 30/60/120/240 seconds
AUTO DOOR LOCK (speed related locking) ON/OFF
REVERSE MIRROR DIP ON/OFF
LAZY ENTRY ON/OFF
RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS YES/NO

Remote control Daytime running lamps


The remote control can be configured to Unless prevented by legislation, it is possible to
operate the following features:- automatically switch on the exterior lamps
• Panic alarm, for personal protection. See whenever the engine is running. See Daytime
Panic alarm, 29. running lamps, 101.
• Headlamp courtesy delay, providing Speed dependent wiper mode
lighting for personal safety. See Headlamp The wiper speed in all modes can be
courtesy delay, 29. automatically varied according to vehicle
• Air suspension control, allows remote speed. See Speed-dependent mode, 104.
operation of the air suspension. See Air
suspension control, 30.
• Tailgate release function, releases the full
tailgate. See Tailgate release, 31.
• Tailglass release function, releases only the
tailglass. See Tailglass release, 31.
• Single point entry, allowing only the drivers
door to be opened remotely. See
Single-point entry, 33.

12
R

Quick Start
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION PARKBRAKE (EPB)
INTERLOCKS The parkbrake is electrically operated.
Vehicles can only be started when the gear
selector lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
position.
To move the lever from P to R, R to P or N to R,
the selector release button (see inset) must be
pressed.

H5951L
To apply the parkbrake, lift the lever and release
AUTO
it. A RED warning indicator in the instrument
1
4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

6
pack will illuminate continuously.
GHI JKL MNO
CD 3
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43

To release the parkbrake, the starter switch


1 2 3 4 5 6
0

must be turned on and pressure must be


applied to the foot brake.
The parkbrake will release automatically if in D
or R the accelerator pedal is pressed. To delay
this release, hold the parkbrake lever in the
raised position until you are ready to move,
then release it.
For more detailed information on the parkbrake,
see PARKBRAKE (EPB), 178.

H6171L

To move from P or N into a drive gear position,


the foot brake must be applied.
For more detailed information on the automatic
gearbox, see AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
USE, 158.

13
L

Quick Start
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS

11 3 1 2 3 11

10
4 9
8

H6742G 5 6 7

1. Auto mode: 7. Economy mode


Press for fully automatic operation 8. Heated rear window
2. Blower control 9. Heated front windshield
3. Temperature controls: 10. Defrost mode
Rotate counter-clockwise for maximum Press to defrost or demist the windshield
cooling 11. Front seat heaters
4. Air distribution controls For more detailed information on the climate
5. Air recirculation control control system, see TEMPERATURE
6. Off: CONTROLS, 113.
Press to switch the system off.

14
R

Quick Start
AUTOMATIC MIRROR DIPPING OCCUPANT DETECTION
If your vehicle is fitted with the driver’s seat The cushion of the front passenger seat is fitted
memory option, the door mirrors may dip when with an occupancy detection system that
reverse gear is selected. This gives the driver a measures the weight on the cushion and
view of the curbside to aid vehicle positioning changes the passenger airbag status to suit.
when reversing. The sensor will adjust the passenger airbag
The feature is optional and can be adjusted by status and operate the status indicator as
the user. follows:
For more detailed information on automatic
mirror dipping, see Reverse mirror dipping, Seat Passenger Status
71. occupancy airbag status indicator
status active
RESONANCE WITH LOWERED
Completely Deactivated No
WINDOWS
empty
If a resonance/booming sound occurs with only
Low weight Deactivated Yes
the rear windows open, lowering an adjacent
occupant/
front window about 25 mm (1 inch) will greatly
child seat/
reduce the condition. This will change the
object
frequency of the air volume moving in/out of
the vehicle and thus lessen or remove the Heavy Activated No
booming sound. occupant/
object

The operational status indicator is located on


the passenger’s side of the instrument panel.
For more details on occupancy detection, see
Occupant detection, 66.

15
L

Quick Start
GENERAL OPERATION Switching on the audio unit

Steering wheel controls

FM 14 : 54
2 107.9 KSAN FM
1 2 3 4 5 6

2
3 ICE1911 NAS

4 To turn on the audio unit, press the rotary


control.
5
To make any of the changes to settings, as
shown in the following pages, the unit must be
switched on.
Volume control

Audio Volume
16
ICE1579 ENG
1 2 3 4 5 6

1. Mode select
2. Volume up
3. Volume down
4. Channel up
ICE1615
ICE 1615ENG
5. Channel down
To increase or decrease the volume level, rotate
the control.
With the engine running, the volume level can
be adjusted between 0 and 35. If the audio unit
is turned off, it will re-start at the previously
selected volume level, provided that this is not
too loud or too quiet.

16
R

Quick Start
Tone and balance settings RADIO OPERATION
Autostore

Bass

1 2 3 4 5 6

FMA 14 : 54
2 106.5 Autostore
1 2 3 4 5 6

ICE2135 NAS

To autostore FM or AM stations, press and hold


ICE1618 ENG
the FM or AM buttons. Autostore will be shown
in the information display and the stations will
To change the Bass, Treble, Balance, Fader, be stored under the pre-set numbers, in the
Subwoofer and Logic 7 settings, press the Tone order that they are found.
button (arrowed) repeatedly until the required To access the stations once stored, press the
setting is displayed, then use the rotary control required pre-set number briefly.
to adjust the setting as required.
For further information, see TONE AND
BALANCE ADJUSTMENT, 305.

17
L

Quick Start
CD OPERATION When inserting a disc into either player, ensure
that the label side of the disc is facing upwards
Inserting a CD and present the disc to the slot. Do not push it
into the slot, the player mechanism will draw
the disc in automatically.
There will be a short pause whilst the player
CD No Discs 14 : 54
Press 1-6 reads the information from the disc, which will
then be displayed on the screen. Play will
commence at the first track on the newly
inserted disc.
Dual and DVDPlus discs
1 2 3
ABC DEF Please be aware that a new generation of DVD
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO discs is being adopted by the music industry.
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9 They are known as Dual Discs or DVDPlus
PQRS TUV WXYZ Please Wait
discs. They have digital music on one side and
0
video content on the other. Current in-car audio
systems with a front loading CD player may
load and play this type of disc, however, it is
likely that the disc will not eject and will block
CD 3 14 : 54
up the player. Such damage to a CD player will
Insert Disc
not be covered under warranty.

ICE1875 ENG

Premium audio unit illustrated


Before inserting a CD into the audio unit, select
CD mode by pressing the CD button.
Note: On Premium audio units it is necessary to
then select an empty CD slot, by pressing the
appropriate disc selection button (e.g. 3). The
six circles at the bottom left-hand side of the
screen represent the six available CD slots. As
soon as one has a CD in it, its number will
appear in the circle. Empty slots are, therefore,
those without numbers.

18
R

Quick Start
CD playback Premium audio: To start CD playback, briefly
press the CD mode button, followed by the disc
number required. If no disc number is selected,
playback will begin at one of two places:
CD 1 14 : 54
Tr 12 3 : 15 • If the discs contained in the player have not
1 2 3 4 5 6
been removed since their last use, playback
will begin from the point at which it was
stopped previously.
• If the discs contained in the player have not
1 2 3
ABC DEF
been used since they were inserted,
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO
CD 3 14 : 54 playback will begin at the start of disc one.
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ Loading Standard audio: CD playback will commence
0
1 2 3 4 5 6
automatically when a CD is inserted.
If a CD is already inserted but the audio system
is currently in radio mode, press the CD mode
6CD-465
button to commence playback.

CD 3 14 : 54
Tr 01 0 : 01
1 2 3 4 5 6

ICE1887 ENG
Premium audio unit illustrated

19
L

Quick Start
VOICE RECOGNITION Defined voice commands
The voice control system understands
Activating the system
predefined commands which need to be quoted
word for word.
An audio feedback of voice commands is
available. To activate the feedback, pull the
voice control paddle briefly and give one of the
following commands:
General commands
• Voice help - To list all commands.
• Notepad Help - To list Notepad
commands.
Audio commands
• Radio help - To list Radio commands.
• CD help - To list CD commands.
See Audio System, 299, for full operating
instructions.
AUTO

Navigation and Telephone commands


• Phone help - To list telephone commands.
• Navigation help - To list Navigation
H6159L commands.
Please refer to the Navigation and
To activate voice control:
Telephone Handbook for full operating
• Briefly pull the control paddle (the Audio instructions.
will mute at this point). A beep will be
For further information, see VOICE
heard, and LISTENING will be displayed on
RECOGNITION, 138.
the main message center to indicate that
the system is now waiting for a voice
command.
Note: It is only necessary to use the steering
wheel voice control paddle at the beginning of
each voice session.

20
R

Gas Station Information


FUEL FILLER
Gas Station Information

The fuel filler is located in the rear right-hand


fender. Press and release the fuel filler flap to
open.
The fuel filler flap springs out, revealing the
filler cap.
Unscrew the filler cap and place it on the
projection on top of the hinge of the fuel filler
flap.
H5944G
Insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck,
pushing aside the spring-loaded cover. Note: For more detailed information, see FUEL
When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle FILLER, 152.
and replace the cap. Tighten the cap clockwise
until you hear it click three times.
Fuel type
V8 engines Premium unleaded gasoline with a CLC or AKI octane rating of 91
or higher. See TYPE OF FUEL, 154.
Note: Mid or regular grade gasoline with a CLC or AKI octane rating
of not lower than 87 may also be used, but performance and fuel
economy will be reduced.

TIRE PRESSURES
Air pressure naturally increases in warm tires
(after the vehicle has been driven for a while). If
you have to check warm tires, you should
expect the pressures to have increased by
between 30 and 40 kPa (0.3 to 0.4 bar) (4 to 6
lb/in2). In this circumstance, NEVER let air out
of the tires in order to match the recommended
pressures.

Loading condition kPa bar lb/in2


All operating conditions Front 260 2.6 38
Rear 290 2.9 42
Compact spare wheel (All operating conditions) 420 4.2 60

Note: For more detailed information, see Tire pressures, 236.

21
L

Gas Station Information


OPENING THE HOOD 1. From inside the vehicle on the left hand
side, pull the hood release handle.
2. Lift the Hood safety catch lever and raise
the hood.
2 Note: For more detailed information, see HOOD
OPENING, 219.

H5945G 1

Engine oil top-up


V8 vehicles Use a 5W/30 oil to specification API GF3 or GF4
Cooling system top-up
All vehicles to -40°C (-40°F) 50% mix of water and an approved antifreeze

Note: For more detailed information, see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 293.

LAND ROVER RECOMMENDS

22
R

General Information
General Information

HANDLING CHARACTERISTICS Cautions


Caution: Cautions are included in this
WARNING handbook. These indicate either a procedure
Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance which must be followed precisely, or
and hence, a higher center of gravity than information that should be considered with
ordinary passenger cars, to enable the great care in order to avoid the possibility of
vehicle to perform in a wide variety of off-road damage to your vehicle.
applications. An advantage of the higher
ground clearance is a better view of the road Symbols
allowing you to anticipate problems. This recycling symbol identifies those
The vehicle is not designed for cornering at items that must be disposed of safely in
the same speed as conventional passenger order to prevent unnecessary damage
cars any more than a low-slung sports car is to the environment.
designed to perform satisfactorily under This symbol identifies those features
off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid that can be adjusted or disabled/enabled
sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvers. As with by a Land Rover Dealer.
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
the vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or vehicle roll-over. For important
safety information, be sure to read the driving
guidelines given later in this handbook.

WARNINGS AND SYMBOLS


The following warnings, cautions and symbols
used within the handbook call your attention to
specific types of information.
Warnings

WARNING
Safety warnings are included in this
handbook. These indicate either a procedure
which must be followed precisely, or
information that should be considered with
great care in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury.

23
L

General Information
WARNING LABELS ATTACHED It is important that you are familiar with these
TO THE VEHICLE subjects to ensure that your vehicle and its
features are used safely. Using the index at the
Warning labels attached to your
back of this handbook, refer to the relevant
vehicle bearing this symbol mean: DO
topic for more information.
NOT touch or adjust components until
you have read the relevant ANTI-THEFT PRECAUTIONS
instructions in the handbook. Take vehicle security very seriously and
Labels showing this symbol indicate ALWAYS adopt this simple four point drill
that the ignition system utilises very whenever you leave your vehicle - even for just
high voltages. DO NOT touch any a few minutes:
ignition components while the ignition 1. Fully close all the windows (and the
is turned on. sunroof).
Warning labels 2. Remove your valuable belongings (or hide
Labels are attached to your vehicle at several them out of sight).
positions. These are applied to draw your 3. Remove the starter key.
attention to important subjects, e.g. tire
4. Lock the vehicle using the remote control
pressures, tow bar use, airbags, roll-over risk,
engine compartment hazards, etc. Thieves are attracted by vulnerable vehicles.
Even if you have followed the four point drill,
there is still much you can do to make your
MFD BY LANDROVER IN THE UK
DATE : MM/YY GVWR: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
vehicle a less inviting target.
GAWR FRONT: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
BE SAFE - NOT SORRY!
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
TXXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIM, AT XXKPA (XXPSI) COLD • Park where your vehicle can be easily seen
GAWR REAR: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
by householders and passers-by.

XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
TXXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIM, AT XXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
At night, park in well lit areas and avoid
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE
U.S.FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
deserted or dimly-lit side streets.
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE

TESTMARK1234567890 • NEVER leave the keys in the vehicle.


TYPE : MULTI - PURPOSE PASSENGER VEHICLE
• Do not keep important documents (or
spare keys) in the vehicle - these are a real
bonus for the thief.
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXXXlbs
TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE SEE OWNER’S
FRONT XXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa MANUAL FOR
RTC500490

XXX/XXRXX
ADDITIONAL
REAR XXPSI XXXkpa
INFORMATION
SPARE TXXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa

H6731N

Example

24
R

General Information
DATA RECORDING CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
Event data recording
WARNING
Event data recorders are capable of collecting WARNING
and storing data during a crash or near-crash Engine exhaust, some of its constituents and
event. The recorded information may assist in certain vehicle components contain or emit
the investigation of such an event. The modules chemicals known to the State of California to
may record information about both the vehicle cause cancer and birth defects or other
and the occupants, potentially including reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
information such as: contained in vehicles and certain products of
• How various systems in your vehicle were components wear contain or emit chemicals
operating. known to the State of California to cause
• Whether or not the driver and passenger cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
seat belts were buckled. harm.
• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or the brake pedal. WARNING
Battery posts, terminals and related
• How fast the vehicle was travelling.
accessories contain lead and lead
• Where the driver was positioning the compounds. Wash hands after handling.
steering wheel.
To access this information special equipment
must be connected directly to the recording
modules. Land Rover do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or third parties acting
with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the
information independently of Land Rover.

25
L

Reporting Safety Defects


Reporting Safety Defects

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS


(U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash, or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Land Rover North America Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your Dealer
or Land Rover North America Inc.
Auto safety hotline
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safecar.gov; or write to:
Administrator,
NHTSA,
400 Seventh Street SW.,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safecar.gov.

26
R

Keys and Remote Controls


Controls and Instruments

KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS Note: Should a remote control be lost or


damaged, a replacement can only be obtained
from your Land Rover Dealer, where it will be
programmed to your vehicle. The Dealer will
require proof of ownership, and keep a log of all
enquiries for replacement remote controls.
It is advisable to notify your Dealer as soon as
possible if a remote control is lost or stolen,
and have the remaining remote control
reprogrammed. This will prevent access to the
vehicle using the lost/stolen remote control.
H5966G Compliance
You have been supplied with two remote The remote control complies with part 15 of the
controls with integral keys which operate all of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following
the vehicle’s locks. conditions:
The operation of all buttons, on remote • This device may not cause harmful
controls, will be inhibited whilst a key is in the interference.
starter switch. • This device must accept any interference
Note: The remote control may not operate received, including interference that may
correctly in areas that are subject to cause undesired operation.
interference from other radio equipment Any changes or modifications to the remote
operating on a similar frequency. Areas where, control not expressly approved by the
for example, equipment such as amateur radio, manufacturer or Land Rover North America Inc.
medical devices, telecommunications could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment or other remotely operated alarms equipment.
are in use may cause difficulty. If such Transmitter FCC ID: NT8-15K6014CFFTXA
difficulties are experienced, try to operate the
Receiver FCC ID: LQN5752
remote control as close as possible to the
vehicle, or use the key in the door lock. See
Emergency locking/unlocking, 35.
The remote controls supplied with your vehicle
are programmed to your security system - the
engine cannot be started without a remote
control programmed to your vehicle.
Caution: Keep the spare remote control in a
safe place - NOT IN THE VEHICLE.

27
L

Keys and Remote Controls


Remote control battery LAND ROVER BUTTON
The battery is rechargeable. The fact that the
Customer programmable button
battery needs recharging will be apparent from
the following:
• KEY BATTERY LOW will be displayed in the
main message center.
• A gradual deterioration in range and
performance will be noticed.
Caution: The remote control contains delicate
electronic circuits and must be protected from
impact and water damage, high temperatures
and humidity, direct sunlight and the effects
H5947G
of solvents, waxes and abrasive cleaners.
The fourth button - marked with the Land Rover
Battery recharge
logo - on the remote control can be
Insert the key into the starter switch and start programmed to give remote operation of one of
the engine. This will start to recharge the the following functions:
remote control battery.
• panic alarm
Battery disposal • headlamp courtesy delay
Used batteries should be recycled. • air suspension control
However, batteries are hazardous - you
• tailgate release
should seek advice about disposal from
a Land Rover Dealer or your local authority. • tailglass release
Note: Programming and subsequent use of the
Vehicle security
Land Rover button will not occur if the key is in
For your own safety, and that of the vehicle, the starter switch.
when the vehicle is left unattended you should:
• Apply the parkbrake.
• Remove all keys and remote controls from
the vehicle prior to locking the doors.
• Close all doors, windows, luggage
compartment (including blind), sunroof,
and glovebox.
• Park the vehicle where it is visible (a well lit
area after dark).
• Keep your vehicle’s keys safely out of sight.
• NEVER leave children or pets unattended in
the vehicle.
• NEVER leave luggage or valuables on
display.

28
R

Keys and Remote Controls


REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAMMING Headlamp courtesy delay
Caution: Be aware that the previously
programmed feature will be activated when
the button is initially pressed to start the
programming sequence.
Panic alarm

H5974G
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7
PQRS
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ
Tr 1 5
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 : 43
Programme by keeping the Land Rover button
pressed and also flashing the headlamps. A
chime from the instrument panel will confirm
successful programming.
A short press of the Land Rover button will now
cause the vehicle’s headlamps to illuminate for
the length of time specified in Settings. See
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 77.
H5973G A second press of the button after three
Programme by keeping the Land Rover button seconds will deactivate the lamps. A further
pressed and also pressing the hazard warning press, within three seconds, will activate the
lamps button on the instrument panel. A chime reverse lamps. A further press will deactivate
from the instrument panel will confirm the headlamps and reverse lamps.
successful programming.
A short press of the Land Rover button will now
cause the vehicle’s alarm to be sounded and the
hazard warning lamps to flash.
The alarm is turned off by pressing the lock or
unlock buttons on the remote control or
inserting the key in the starter switch.

29
L

Keys and Remote Controls


Air suspension control If any button is released during the raising or
lowering of the suspension, all movement of
the suspension will stop. It will restart once the
buttons are pressed again.
The height will initially change slowly but, after
three seconds, the speed will increase. While
the height is changing, a symbol on the
raise/lower switch will be lit according to the
direction of movement. See Adjusting
suspension heights, 186.
If the starting height is above or below On-road
height, movement will stop when On-road
height is reached. Further movement can be
achieved by releasing the buttons and pressing
them again.
See AIR SUSPENSION, 185.

H5975L

Programme by keeping the Land Rover button


pressed and also pressing the suspension
control switch. A chime from the instrument
panel will confirm successful programming.
Programming of this function must be done
within one minute of switching off the engine.
After programming, to change the suspension
height via the remote control, remove the
starter key, turn on the hazard warning lamps
and close all the doors. Remote operation is not
possible unless this is done.
To raise the vehicle, press and hold the Land
Rover button and Lock button.
To lower the vehicle, press and hold the Land
Rover button and Unlock button.

30
R

Keys and Remote Controls


Tailgate release Tailglass release

H6370G
H6369G
Programme by keeping the Land Rover button
Programme by keeping the Land Rover button pressed and also pressing the main tailglass
pressed and also pressing the main tailgate release button situated under the rear license
release button on the rear tailgate. plate plinth.
A short press of the button will now cause the A short press of the button will now cause the
vehicle’s tailgate to release. vehicle’s tailglass to release.

31
L

Locks and Alarms


Locks and Alarms

ALARM SYSTEM Anti-theft alarm indicator

H5969G

The indicator provides information about the


status of the alarm and immobiliser systems, as
follows:
H5967G
When the alarm is armed:
Your vehicle is fitted with a sophisticated
electronic anti-theft alarm and engine The indicator will double flash for 10 seconds,
immobilisation system. There are also a then continue to single flash until the vehicle is
number of additional security features, some of disarmed and remobilised.
which are selectable options and some are When the alarm is disarmed but the vehicle is
standard features of the vehicle. immobilised (key out of starter switch):
In order to ensure maximum security and The indicator will single flash until the alarm is
operating convenience, you are strongly armed or the vehicle is remobilised.
advised to gain a full understanding of the
features and alternatives available, by When the alarm is disarmed and the vehicle
thoroughly reading this section of the is mobilised (key in starter switch):
handbook. The indicator gives a one-second flash.

32
R

Locks and Alarms


If the alarm sounds Single-point entry
If the alarm is triggered, the alarm will sound This is a personal security feature, which
and the hazard warning lamps will flash for 30 enables only the driver's door to be unlocked,
seconds, before resetting to the same leaving the other doors in a locked state.
protection status that existed prior to the alarm Single-point entry can be disabled on individual
being triggered. remote controls by pressing and holding the
To silence the alarm, press the lock or unlock lock and unlock buttons together for three
button on the remote control or insert the key seconds.
into the starter switch. Pressing the lock button All doors will now unlock with a single press.
will keep the alarm armed.
Repeating the procedure will re-enable single
When the vehicle is disarmed, the hazard point entry.
warning lamps will quickly flash eight times if
Each time single-point entry is enabled or
the alarm has sounded since the vehicle was
disabled, the vehicle will lock then unlock into
last armed.
the selected mode.
Perimetric alarm
ENGINE IMMOBILISATION
This feature is activated automatically
whenever the vehicle is locked using the remote Engine immobilisation is an important aspect of
control and protects the doors, hood and the security system. It is designed to safeguard
tailgate. the vehicle from theft, should the driver forget
to lock the doors. The system prevents the
If any of these apertures are opened, or a key
engine from being started unless the GENUINE
that has not been programmed to the vehicle is
remote control key is inserted into the starter
inserted into the starter switch, while the
switch.
feature is activated, the alarm will be triggered.
Engine immobilisation is automatic five
When the perimetric alarm is activated the
seconds after the key is removed from the
direction/turn indicators will flash three times,
starter switch.
and the anti-theft alarm indicator will flash.
Note: The engine will be re-mobilised
Mislock automatically whenever the genuine remote
If an aperture is open when an attempt is made control key is inserted into the starter
to lock the vehicle an audible warning will switch.When this happens, the anti-theft alarm
sound once to indicate that the vehicle is not indicator will illuminate for one second and
secure. then extinguish.

33
L

Locks and Alarms


LOCKING/UNLOCKING The hazard warning lamps will quickly flash
While it is not necessary to point the remote eight times when the vehicle is disarmed if
control at the vehicle, the remote control must the alarm has sounded since the vehicle
be within range of the vehicle when a button is was last armed.
pressed. 4. Customer Configuration - Land Rover
Note: If the remote control fails to work even button: This button can be configured to
when close to the vehicle, it could be that it is operate panic alarm, headlamp courtesy
not synchronised with the system. See delay, tailgate release, tailglass release or
Emergency locking/unlocking, 35. Putting the suspension control. See LAND ROVER
key in the starter switch and running the engine BUTTON, 28.
for six minutes will restore full operation.
The operating range may vary depending upon
remote control battery condition and may
sometimes be limited by physical and
geographical factors beyond your control.
Note: If a key is in the starter switch, the vehicle
will not respond to remote control commands.
Locking with the remote control
Remove the key from the starter switch and
shut all doors, the hood and the tailgate.
The four buttons on the remote control are used
as follows:
1. Key release button.
2. Lock button: Press to lock all doors and to
activate the perimetric alarm.
The direction/turn indicator lamps will flash
three times. 1
3. Unlock button: Press once to disarm the
alarm and unlock the driver’s door and to
activate the Lazy entry feature. See Lazy
entry, 47. Press again to unlock the 2
remaining doors. See Single-point entry,
33. 3
In either case, the interior lamps illuminate
and the direction/turn indicators flash 4
once.

H5968G

34
R

Locks and Alarms


Partial arming
If the driver’s door is not fully closed when the
remote control lock button is pressed, the
doors will remain unlocked and the alarm will
remain disarmed. A brief sound from the
vehicle horn will confirm that the door is not
fully closed.
If a passenger door or other aperture is not fully
closed when the remote control lock button is
pressed, the partial arming attributes of the
security system will enable as much of the
system to be armed as possible (all fully closed
door, hood or tailgate apertures will be
protected, but an open one will not).
A brief sound from the vehicle’s horn will
confirm that an aperture is not fully closed.
As soon as the open aperture is closed, the
system will automatically arm, signalled by
three flashes of the hazard warning lamps.
Emergency locking/unlocking
Under a removable cap on the left front door
outer handle, there is an emergency-use door
lock.
Removing the cap
1. Insert the key fully into the slot under the
handle cap.
2. The cap can now be removed at the forward
edge and unhooked from the rear edge.
3. Remove the key from the slot and use it in H5970G

the emergency lock.


Locking
Turn the key clockwise to lock only the local
door. To lock all of the doors press the master
lock switch, then exit the vehicle through the
front left door. Lock the left front door by
turning the key clockwise (this will not arm the
alarm system).

35
L

Locks and Alarms


Unlocking Refitting the cap
Turn the key in the left front door lock
counter-clockwise to unlock only the local
door.
If the alarm system is not armed, turn the key
counter-clockwise to unlock the left front door.
To unlock the rest of the doors press the master
unlock switch.
Note: Unlocking the left front door by the key
will not disarm the alarm, if it was previously
set. The alarm will sound when the door is
unlocked. To disable the alarm, insert the key
into the starter switch.

H5971G

1. Insert the key fully into the slot in the


handle cap.
2. Hook the cap onto the lock barrel at the rear
edge.
3. Push the front edge of the cap onto the
panel.
4. Remove the key from the slot.

36
R

Locks and Alarms


Master lock switch and unlock switch Speed-related locking
This security feature locks all the doors
automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds
8 km/h (5 mph).
Note: The speed at which speed-related locking
occurs is not selectable by the driver. Any
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
presses of the master lock or unlock switches
4 5 6

will over-ride the speed locking function, and


GHI JKL MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

will remain in that state for the whole journey.


Speed-related locking can be selected
1 3 2 or deselected by a Land Rover Dealer or
by the driver.
See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 77.
Automatic relock
If the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control and one minute elapses before a door or
H5978N the tailgate is opened, the vehicle will relock and
the alarm will re-arm.
1. Pressing the master unlock switch will
unlock all of the doors. Automatic unlocking
If the vehicle is involved in a collision forceful
2. Pressing the master lock switch will lock all
enough to cause a restraints device to deploy,
of the doors.
all door locks will automatically be unlocked
3. Simultaneously pressing both the master and the hazard warning lamps will start to flash.
lock and unlock switches for three seconds The interior lamps will also illuminate.
will cause the whole tailgate to release.
Tailgate emergency unlock
Simultaneously pressing both the master lock
and unlock switches for three seconds will
cause the whole tailgate to release. This is an
emergency release function in case the tailgate
exterior release switch becomes inoperative.

37
L

Locks and Alarms


Interior door handles and locking levers CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

BAD 500030 L7MTA

H5979L

From inside the vehicle, each door can be


H5981G
individually locked by pushing the appropriate
lever (arrowed). Child safety locks are fitted to the rear doors.
To unlock and open a front door, simply pull the Open a rear door and insert the starter key into
door handle. the child safety keyhole. Turn the key one
To open a rear door, first return the locking quarter of a turn so that the top of the key
lever to its unlocked position, then pull the door moves away from the vehicle. Repeat for the
handle. other door.
When the master lock or unlock switch is used, With the child safety locks engaged, the rear
or speed related locking is activated, all door doors cannot be opened from inside the
locking levers will activate automatically. vehicle. This prevents a door from being
opened accidentally.
Inserting the key and turning it in the opposite
direction disengages the lock.

WARNING
TO AVOID INJURY OR DEATH, NEVER LEAVE
CHILDREN UNSUPERVISED IN THE VEHICLE.

38
R

Locks and Alarms


TAILGATE Opening the tailglass

Opening the tailgate

H5982G

With all doors unlocked, press the touch pad on


H5983G the underside of the exterior handle and pull to
open.
With all doors unlocked, press the tailgate
release button on the right-hand side of the
tailgate.
If the tailgate fails to open, an emergency
procedure is available.
Note: If the tailgate is open, the system
prohibits the tailglass release, and vice versa. It
will only accept another release when the open
panel has been closed.
Tailgate emergency unlock
Simultaneously pressing both the master lock
and unlock switches for three seconds will
cause the whole tailgate to release. This is an
emergency release function in case the tailgate
exterior release switch becomes inoperative.

39
L

Seats
Seats

FRONT SEATS
A
WARNING
To reduce the risk of loss of control and
personal injury, DO NOT adjust the driver's
seat while the vehicle is in motion.
B
Sitting correctly
The seats, head restraints, seat belts and
airbags all contribute to the protection of the
occupants. Optimal use of these components
will give you more protection. Therefore,
observe the following points:
• Sit in the most upright position with the
base of your spine as far back as possible H6608N

and the backrest reclined not more than A


30 degrees.
• Do not move the driver’s seat too close to
the steering wheel. Ideally, a minimum
distance B of at least 25 cm (10 in.)
between the center of the breastbone and
the cover of the steering wheel airbag is
recommended. The driver should hold the
steering wheel with slightly bent arms. The
legs should also be slightly bent so that the
pedals can be pressed to the floor.
• The seat belt should rest in the center of the
shoulder. The lap part should fit tightly
across the hips and not on the stomach.
Make sure your driving position is comfortable
and enables you to maintain full control of the
vehicle. A properly adjusted seat helps reduce
the risk of injury from sitting too close to an
inflating airbag.
Note: For information on adjusting the steering
column, see STEERING COLUMN
ADJUSTMENT, 69.

40
R

Seats
FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT Forward/backward adjustment
The seat adjustment controls are situated on
the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Note: In order to change the position of any
part of the power-operated seats, the starter
key must be in positions I or II. Power operated
Memory Driver’s seat also has a 10 minute
active period initiated when:
• The driver’s door is opened/closed
• The starter key is turned to the off position

WARNING
DO NOT adjust any part of a seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
Vehicle movement may cause the seat to
suddenly shift, potentially causing injury.

H6605N

Push and hold the switch to move the seat to


the desired position. Release the switch to stop
adjustment.

41
L

Seats
Seat back adjustment Seat cushion height adjustment

H6601N H6602N

Twist the switch until the desired seat back Push the switch up or down to raise or lower
angle is achieved. Release the switch to stop the cushion. Release the switch to stop
adjustment. adjustment.

WARNING
DO NOT travel with the seat backs reclined
steeply rearwards. Optimum benefit is
obtained from the seat belt with the seat back
angle set to no more than 30 degrees from the
upright (vertical).
Failure to maintain the correct seat back
angle will reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belts and increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a crash.

42
R

Seats
Seat cushion edge adjustment Lumbar support adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)

H6405N

A separate switch located in the side of the seat


H6603N
provides for adjustment of lumbar support.
Push the switch up or down to raise or lower Press the front end of the switch to stiffen the
the front edge of the cushion. Release the support or the rear end of the switch to relax the
switch to stop adjustment. support. Release the switch to stop adjustment.

43
L

Seats
Folding armrest Head restraint adjustment and removal

H5996L

Adjust the head restraint correctly, up or down


by pressing the collar button as indicated. The
top of the head restraint should be above the
center line of the head.
H6604N See Sitting correctly, 40.
Some vehicles are fitted with adjustable front WARNING
seat armrests. These are used in the horizontal Head restraints are designed to support the
position or can be stowed vertically alongside back of the head (NOT THE NECK), and to
the seat backrest. restrain rearward movement of the head in
The horizontal position can be adjusted for the event of a collision. The restraint must be
height by turning the knob set into the end of positioned as described to be effective.
the armrest. Turning the knob clockwise raises DO NOT drive or carry passengers with the
the armrest; counter-clockwise lowers it. head restraints removed from occupied seats,
or adjust the head restraints while the vehicle
is in motion.
Failure to have the head restraint installed
and properly positioned will increase the
potential for serious injuries.

44
R

Seats
Rear Seat Entertainment
If Rear Seat Entertainment is fitted, the front
head restraints can be adjusted for height, but
cannot be removed from the seat.
Caution: When rear seat passengers are
entering or leaving the vehicle it is important
that they do not hold the head restraint to ease
entry/exit. This may damage the Video
Display Screens.
The Video Display Screens fitted to the rear of
the front seat head restraints are NOT
touch-screens. Avoid contact with the screen
wherever possible.
Only clean the screens using the Land Rover
approved cleaning materials available from
your Land Rover dealer.

WARNING
The video display screens contain toxic
substances including Mercury. These
substances can cause severe illness and
H6502L
possibly death.
Remove the head restraint by pressing the In the event that a video display screen is
collar button as indicated, whilst lifting the damaged, avoid all contact with it, and
restraint clear of the seat. contact your dealer as soon as possible.
To replace the head restraint, engage the guide
posts into the collars and press the restraint
HEATED SEATS
downwards until a click is heard.
For information on operating the front and rear
seat heaters see, SEAT HEATERS, 116.

45
L

Seats
DRIVER’S SEAT MEMORY
FACILITY

2 1

H6006L 3

WARNING Setting a memory pre-set


Before activating the seat memory, ensure 1. Insert the starter key and turn it to position
that the area immediately surrounding the I or ll.
seat is clear of obstructions and that all 2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
occupants are clear of moving parts. desired position. See Reverse mirror
dipping, 71.
1. Memory store button 3. Press the memory store button (1) to
2. Memory pre-set buttons activate the memory function.
3. Seat adjustment controls (see FRONT 4. Within five seconds, press the desired
SEAT ADJUSTMENT, 41 for further pre-set button (2).
information). 5. Memory Stored will be displayed on the
Your vehicle can memorise up to three different message center to confirm the storing
driver seating positions for each of three action. A single chime will sound from the
possible starter keys. This enables three instrument panel to confirm storing.
separate drivers to achieve optimum comfort at
the touch of a button.
Note: For information on adjusting the mirrors,
see EXTERIOR MIRRORS, 70.

46
R

Seats
Recalling a stored seat position
Providing the power operated memory seat is
active (see FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT, 41),
press the pre-set button associated with the
desired driving position. The seat and mirrors
will move to the position stored on that pre-set.
A confirmation message will display in the
message center and a double chime will sound
when adjustments are complete.
Note: To stop seat movement at any time when
recalling a memory setting, press any seat
adjustment control.
Lazy entry
When the lazy entry option is selected and the
vehicle is unlocked using the remote control,
the vehicle adjusts the driver’s seat and the
exterior mirrors to the position associated with
that particular remote control.
Lazy entry and associated options can be
selected or deselected by a Land Rover Dealer
or by selecting Settings (see SELECTING
SETTINGS OPTION, 77).

47
L

Seats
REAR SEATS
WARNING
DO NOT adjust any part of a seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
Vehicle movement may cause the seat to
suddenly shift, potentially causing injury.

Folding down the seats


One or both parts of the split rear seat can be
fully folded to further increase the rear
loadspace.
Before attempting to fold down the seats,
remove the outboard seat belts from the seat
belt guides and remove any items from the rear
seats and footwell.
If the front seats are in their rearmost position,
move them forward. They can be returned to
their original position after the rear seat backs
have been folded down.
Ensure that the head restraints are fully
lowered, See Head restraint adjustment and
H6009G
removal, 44. Press in the collar at the base of
the head restraint support, and push the head
restraint down. WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in the
Using the strap at the rear of each cushion, pull
loadspace. In a collision, anyone riding in
the required cushions forwards as far as they
this area is more likely to be injured or killed.
will travel .
Do not allow anyone to ride in any area of your
To fold a backrest forwards, pull the seat vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
backrest release lever(s). While pulling the seat belts. Be sure that everyone in your
lever(s) located on the top edges of the vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt
backrests, tip the seat backrest(s) forwards as properly.
far as possible.
Note: Only Land Rover approved seat covers
and accessories should be used on these seats.

48
R

Seats
Returning the seats to the upright position Replace the outboard seat belts back into the
seat belt guides.

WARNING
After the seat is returned to the upright
position, the latching mechanism should be
checked and physically tested to ensure that
both the seat base and backrest are secure
before driving.
Also, ensure that the head restraint is
adjusted correctly for each passenger (the top
of the head restraint should be above the
center line of the head).

Rear seat armrest

H6010G

If the front seats are in their rearmost position,


move them forward. They can be returned to
their original position after the rear seats have
been returned to the upright position.
Pull the strap vertically on the back of the seat
to unlock the seat. Continue to pull to raise the H6013G
backrest(s) until they click into position. Push
the seat cushion(s) firmly back into position. To release the armrest, first pull the loop at the
top of the center seat/armrest (see inset.), then
Visually check that the lever is fully in place. If
push the armrest downwards to the required
it has not returned to its locked position, red
position.
flags will be visible around the lever sides.
To replace, raise the armrest and push until a
To raise the head restraint, pull it upwards to
click is heard when latched.
the required height.

49
L

Seats
Head restraint adjustment and removal

H6011G
H6504G
Adjust the head restraint correctly (up or down)
for each passenger by pressing the collar Remove the head restraint by pressing the
button as indicated. The top of the head collar button and indented button as indicated,
restraint should be above the center line of the whilst lifting the restraint clear of the seat.
head. To replace the head restraint, engage the guide
posts into the collars and press the restraint
WARNING downwards until a click is heard.
Head restraints are designed to support the
back of the head (NOT THE NECK), and to
restrain rearward movement of the head in
the event of a collision. The restraint must be
positioned as described to be effective.
DO NOT drive or carry passengers with the
head restraints removed from occupied seats,
or adjust the head restraints while the vehicle
is in motion.
Failure to have the head restraint installed
and properly positioned will increase the
potential for serious injuries.

50
R

Seat Belts
Seat Belts

SEAT BELTS SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS


The use of front and rear seat belts is The seat belt pretensioners activate in
mandatory in most states. Using seat belts conjunction with the airbag SRS and provide
saves lives. They should be worn by all additional protection in the event of a severe
occupants whenever the vehicle is in use, for frontal impact on the vehicle (see HOW THE
maximum protection. AIRBAG SRS WORKS, 63). The pretensioners
Lap/shoulder inertia reel seat belts are provided automatically retract the seat belts fitted to the
for both front seat occupants and all rear seat front seats. This reduces any slack in both the
positions. lap and diagonal portions of the belts, thereby
reducing forward movement of the belt wearer
The inertia reel operating mechanism of the
in the event of a severe frontal collision.
seat belts allows the wearers to move their
upper bodies to reach various controls. The The airbag SRS warning indicator on the
seat belt locks automatically with accelerated instrument pack will alert you to any
body movement or in the event of emergency malfunction of the seat belt pretensioners.
braking. If the pretensioners have been activated, the
The seat belts include a buckle sensor to detect seat belts will still function as restraints, and
when the buckle is latched. must be worn in the event that the vehicle
remains in a driveable condition.
The front seat belt assemblies are fitted with
pre-tensioners. The pre-tensioners operate Note: The seat belt pretensioners will be
with the airbags as part of the Airbag activated in major side and frontal impacts and
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS). See in roll-overs.
HOW THE AIRBAG SRS WORKS, 63. WARNING
Seat belt warning indicator The seat belt pretensioners will only be
Seat belt warning commences activated once and then MUST BE REPLACED
when the starter switch is turned by a Land Rover Dealer. Failure to replace the
to position ll and the driver’s belt pretensioners will reduce the efficiency of the
is unbuckled. vehicle's front restraint systems.
After any impact, always have the seat belts
Seat belt reminder
and pretensioners checked and, if necessary,
A warning chime will sound (one second replaced by a Land Rover Dealer.
frequency) if the driver's seat belt has not been
In the interests of safety, it is recommended
fastened when the starter switch is turned on.
that removal or replacement of the front seats
The chime operates in conjunction with the seat
and seat belts should only be carried out by a
belt warning indicator and sounds for 6
Land Rover Dealer.
seconds, or until the seat belt is fastened
(whichever occurs first).

51
L

Seat Belts
Seat belt locking mechanism SEAT BELT USE DURING PREGNANCY
The passenger seat belts have a special locking
mechanism which retains large items securely. WARNING
Position the seat belt correctly for the safety
To use:
of the mother and unborn child. Never wear
1. Place the item on the seat. just the lap strap and never sit on the lap strap
2. Pull the seat belt around the item, using when using just the shoulder strap. Both of
both the lap and shoulder parts of the belt. these actions are extremely dangerous and
3. Fasten the seat belt. may increase your risk of serious injury in the
event of an accident.
4. Pull on the shoulder part of the belt to
unreel all of the remaining belt. This will Position the lap strap comfortably across the
engage the automatic locking feature which hips, beneath the abdomen. Place the diagonal
only allows the belt to retract. part of the seat belt between the breasts and to
5. Allow the seat belt to retract onto the item the side of the abdomen. Ensure that the seat
(a clicking sound will confirm that the belt is not slack or twisted.
mechanism has engaged).
6. Ensure that there is no slack in the seat belt
by pulling upwards on the shoulder belt
immediately above the item. The item will
now be held firmly in position by the belt.
When the seat belt is released and is allowed to
fully retract, the seat belt locking mechanism
reverts to normal operation.

WARNING H6016G
Where possible, use the seat belt automatic
locking mechanism to secure large items that WARNING
are to be carried on the seats. In the event of
Never place anything between you and the
an accident, loose items become projectiles
seat belt in an attempt to cushion the impact
capable of causing serious injury. Care must
in the event of an accident. It can be
be taken to prevent any sharp edges
dangerous and reduce the effectiveness of the
damaging the belt.
seat belt in preventing injury.
Use the seat belt automatic locking
mechanism to restrain pets in harnesses or
pet carriers when not utilising the loadspace.

52
R

Seat Belts
SEAT BELT SAFETY WARNING
WARNING Ensure that all seat belts are worn correctly -
an improperly worn seat belt increases the
Seat belts are life saving equipment. In a
risk of death or serious injury in the event of a
collision, occupants not wearing a seat belt
collision.
can be thrown around inside, or possibly
thrown out of the vehicle. This is likely to Belts should not be worn with the straps
result in more serious injuries than would twisted.
have been the case had a seat belt been Each belt assembly must only be used by one
properly worn. It may even result in loss of occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around
life. a child being carried on the occupant’s lap.
Make sure ALL occupants are securely It is essential to replace the entire assembly
strapped in at all times - even for the shortest after it has been worn in a severe impact even
journeys. if damage to the assembly is not obvious.
The airbag supplemental restraint system No modifications or additions should be made
(SRS) is designed to add to the overall by the user which will either prevent the seat
effectiveness of the seat belts. It does not belt adjusting devices from operating to
replace them. SEAT BELTS MUST ALWAYS BE remove slack, or prevent the seat belt
WORN. assembly from being adjusted to remove
Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony slack.
structure of the body and should be worn low Should the seat belt not retract and remain at
across the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as its static length, consult your Land Rover
applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt Dealer immediately.
across the abdominal area must be avoided. Care should be taken to avoid contamination
DO NOT wear seat belts over hard, sharp or of the webbing with polishes, oils and
fragile items in clothing, such as pens, keys, chemicals, and particularly battery acid.
spectacles, etc. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as soap and water. The belt should be replaced
possible, consistent with comfort, to provide if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or
the protection for which they are designed. A damaged.
slack belt will greatly reduce the protection
afforded to the wearer.
DO NOT allow front seat occupants to travel
with the seat backs reclined steeply
rearwards. Optimum benefit is obtained from
the seat belt with the seatback angle set to no
more than 30 degrees from the upright.

53
L

Seat Belts
FRONT SEAT BELTS Upper anchorage adjustment

Fastening the seat belts

H6018G

The height of the seat belt upper anchorage can


be adjusted for comfort AND safety on both
H6017G
front seats. Press down (solid arrow) to release
Pull the belt over the shoulder and across the the catch, then lift or push down to adjust the
chest and, ensuring that the webbing is not height of the anchorage. For safety, the seat belt
twisted, insert the metal tongue plate into the should always be worn with the webbing
buckle nearest the wearer - a CLICK indicates crossing the shoulder MIDWAY BETWEEN THE
that the belt is securely locked. NECK AND THE EDGE OF THE SHOULDER.
Releasing the belt Ensure the anchorage has clicked into one of
the locked positions before driving.
Press the RED button on the seat belt buckle.
Where possible, rear seat passengers should
WARNING adjust their position on the seat to enable the
Never wear just the lap strap of a lap/shoulder seat belt webbing to cross the shoulder without
diagonal seat belt and never sit on the lap pressing on the neck.
strap using just the shoulder strap. Both of
these actions are extremely dangerous and WARNING
may increase your risk of serious injury. Maladjustment of the seat belt could reduce
its effectiveness in a crash. Always ensure
that the anchorage is correctly located and
properly locked in one of the height positions
before driving and DO NOT adjust the height
once the vehicle is in motion.

54
R

Seat Belts
CARING FOR SEAT BELTS Service information
Regularly inspect the belt webbing for signs of WARNING
fraying, cuts and wear; also pay particular DO NOT attempt to service, repair, replace,
attention to the condition of the fixing points modify or tamper with any part of the
and adjusters. pretensioner and airbag SRS, or wiring in the
DO NOT bleach or dye the webbing and avoid vicinity of a pretensioner or airbag SRS
contaminating the webbing with polish, oil or component; this could cause the system to
chemicals (see Seat belts, 254). activate, resulting in personal injury.
Testing inertia reel belts
In addition, ALWAYS contact your Land Rover
• With the seat belt fastened, give the Dealer if:
webbing near the buckle a quick upward
• an airbag inflates.
pull. The buckle must remain securely
locked. • a pretensioner activates.
• With the seat belt unfastened, unreel the • the front or side of the vehicle is damaged,
webbing to the limit of its travel. Check that even if the pretensioner has not activated.
unreeling is free from snatches and snags
and then allow the belt to FULLY retract.
• Partially unreel the webbing, then hold and
give it a quick forward pull. The mechanism
must lock automatically and prevent any
further unreeling.
If a seat belt should fail any of these tests,
contact your Land Rover Dealer immediately.

WARNING
Always replace a seat belt that shows signs of
webbing damage or has withstood the strain
of a severe vehicle impact.

Note: If the vehicle is parked on ground that is


not level, the seat belt mechanism may lock.
This is not a fault; gently ease the belt from the
upper anchorage to release.

55
L

Child Restraints
Child Restraints

CHILD SEATS Seat belt locking mechanism


The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are The passenger seat belts have a special locking
designed for adults and larger children. For mechanism which aids the retention of child
their safety, it is very important that all infants seats. The procedure to install a child seat is as
and children under 12 years are restrained in a follows:
suitable child safety seat appropriate to their 1. Place the child seat in the vehicle, attach
age and size. the seat belt and secure the buckle in
Only fit a child seat that has been approved for accordance with the manufacturer’s fitting
use in your vehicle, and ensure that the instructions.
manufacturer's fitting instructions are followed 2. Pull on the shoulder section of the belt to
exactly. unreel all of the remaining webbing to the
For optimum safety, children should travel in limit of its travel. This will engage the
the rear of the vehicle at all times, front automatic locking feature, which then acts
passenger seat travel is NOT recommended. as a ratchet, allowing the webbing ONLY to
retract.
Note: Crash statistics show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear 3. Allow the seat belt to retract onto the child
seating positions, than they are in the front. seat (a clicking sound will confirm that the
ratchet has engaged), while firmly pushing
However, if it is essential that a child travel in
the child seat into the vehicle seat.
the front, set the seat fully rearward and seat
the child in a FORWARD FACING child seat. 4. Ensure that there is no slack in the seat belt
by pulling upwards on the shoulder belt
This symbol affixed to the
immediately above the child restraint. This
passenger side B post of your
seat belt should now be locked and the
vehicle, warns against the use of
child seat held firmly in position.
a REAR-FACING child seat in the
front passenger seat, when a When the child seat is removed and all of the
passenger airbag is fitted and operational. seat belt webbing is allowed to retract, the seat
belt locking mechanism reverts to normal
WARNING operation.
EXTREME HAZARD. Do not use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected by an
airbag in front of it. There is a risk of serious
injury or death when the airbag deploys.

WARNING
Do not use a forward-facing seat until a child
is above the minimum weight of 9 kg (20 lb.)
and able to sit up unaided. Up to the age of
two, a child’s spine and neck are not
sufficiently developed to avoid injury in a
frontal impact.

56
R

Child Restraints
Child restraints for small children and babies WARNING
Child seats and restraint systems designed for DO NOT allow a baby or infant to be carried on
your vehicle will be one of two types: the lap. The force of a crash can increase
• Those secured in vehicle seats by the seat effective body weight by as much as 30 times,
belts. making it impossible to hold on to the child.
• LATCH type child restraints employing Children typically require the use of a booster
anchor bars built into the rear seat frame. seat appropriate to their age and size, thereby
enabling the seat belts to be properly fitted,
All new and most older type child restraint
reducing the risk of injury in a crash.
systems incorporate a tether strap which can
Children could be endangered in a crash if
be attached to an anchorage point on the
their child restraints are not properly secured
vehicle. See Tether anchorages, 59.
in the vehicle.
Child restraints for larger children DO NOT use a child seat that hooks over the
In a situation where a child is too large to fit into seat back. This type of seat cannot be
a child safety seat, but is still too small to safely satisfactorily secured, and is unlikely to be
fit the 3 point seat belt properly, a booster seat safe for your child.
is recommended for maximum safety. Follow Never leave a child unattended in your
the manufacturer’s fitting instructions exactly, vehicle.
then adjust the seat belt to suit.

57
L

Child Restraints
LATCH CHILD RESTRAINTS Fitting LATCH child restraints
(Rear seats) LATCH child restraints should only be fitted in
Both outer, rear seating positions in your the two outer seating positions of the rear
vehicle are equipped to accept LATCH seats. Anchor bars built into the rear seat
restraints. frame, enable the LATCH restraints to be
securely attached to the vehicle seat only in
This symbol on the label sewn into these positions.
the seats indicates the location of
the LATCH lower anchorages. In addition, two tether anchor bars are fitted to
back of the rear seats, to secure child restraint
anchor straps.
When fitting LATCH child restraints, always
follow the instructions supplied by the
manufacturer of the restraint.
Once the LATCH restraint is installed, you are
recommended to test the security of the
installation before seating the child. Attempt to
twist the restraint from side to side and to pull
the restraint away from the vehicle seat; then
check that the anchors are still securely in
place.

WARNING
If the restraint is not correctly anchored, there
is a significant risk of injury to the child in the
event of a collision or emergency braking.

H6019G

WARNING
DO NOT attempt to fit LATCH restraints to the
center seating position - the anchor bars are
not designed to hold a LATCH restraint in this
position.

58
R

Child Restraints
Tether anchorages Attaching tether straps
Upper tether anchorages are provided for each 1. Install the child restraint securely in one of
seating position equipped to accept LATCH the second row seating positions.
child restraints. Move the hinged panel to 2. Pass the tether strap over the back of the
expose the anchor points. vehicle seat and beneath the underside of
the head restraint.
3. Attach the clip on the head of the tether
FRONT OF
VEHICLE strap to the tether anchor on the back of the
vehicle seat.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack in the webbing.

WARNING
Always follow the child seat or restraint
system manufacturer’s instructions when
fitting tether straps.
When fitting a child seat or restraint system,
always pass the tether strap over the top of
the seat back and beneath the underside of
the head restraint.
If a child seat or restraint system is to be fitted
to the center seating position, the center
armrest must be in the stowed position
(folded into the seat).
H6381K

Note: Always ensure that, if an upper tether is


provided, it is secured and tightened properly
as this provides the maximum protection for a
child.

WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only loads imposed by correctly
fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.

59
L

Child Restraints
CHILD RESTRAINT CHECK LISTS LATCH child restraints
Follow the check list every time a child travels
Non-LATCH child restraints
in the vehicle:
Follow the check list every time a child travels
• Always attach the top tether when
in the vehicle:
installing the LATCH seat.
• Carefully follow the instructions provided
• Carefully follow the instructions supplied
by the manufacturer of the restraint
with the child seat.
system.
• Always give the LATCH seat a final pull to
• Always use the appropriate child restraints
ensure that the lower anchors are secure.
and adjust harnesses for every child, every
trip. • Always use the appropriate child restraints
and adjust the harnesses for every child,
• Avoid dressing a child in bulky clothing and
every trip.
do not place any objects between the child
and the restraint system. • Make sure that a child falls into the correct
weight range for the seat.
• Regularly check the fit of a child seat and
replace seats or harnesses that show signs • Avoid dressing a child in bulky clothing and
of wear. do not place any objects between the child
and the restraint system.
• Ensure that you have removed all slack
from the adult seat belt. • Regularly check the fit of a child seat and
replace seats and harnesses that show
• No child seat is completely child-proof.
signs of wear.
Encourage a child not to play with the
buckle or harness. • No child seat is completely child-proof.
Encourage children not to play with the
• Never leave a child unsupervised in the
buckle or harness.
vehicle.
• Never leave a child unsupervised in the
• Activate the rear door child safety locks,
vehicle.
see CHILD SAFETY LOCKS, 38.
• Activate the rear door child safety locks,
• Ensure that a child does not exit the vehicle
see CHILD SAFETY LOCKS, 38.
from the side where there is traffic.
• Ensure that a child does not exit the vehicle
• Set children a good example - always wear
from the side where there is traffic.
your seat belt.
• Set children a good example - always wear
your seat belt.

60
R

Airbag SRS
Airbag SRS

H6606N

WARNING WARNING
The airbag is a supplementary restraint The airbag module inflates with considerable
system that provides ADDITIONAL protection speed and force. For your safety:
in a severe impact only - it does NOT replace An inflating airbag can cause facial abrasions
the need to wear a seat belt. To reduce the and other injuries. The injurious effects of
risk of severe injury or death in the event of a airbag inflation can be reduced, by ensuring
crash, all occupants in all seating positions, driver and passenger are seated correctly,
including the driver, should always wear their with the seat moved back as far as is
seat belt, whether or not an airbag is present practical, and the seat belts worn correctly.
at that seating position.
National Highway Traffic Safety
Ensure that a gap is maintained between the Administration (NHTSA) recommends a
side of the vehicle and the head and torso, to minimum distance of 10 inches (25 cm)
enable unobstructed inflation of the curtain between an occupant’s chest and the driver’s
and seat mounted side airbags. airbag module.
DO NOT lean out of the window. NEVER attach accessory items to an airbag
module cover.
Both front seating positions are equipped with
knee bolsters to provide knee protection in
the event of an impact. DO NOT modify the
bolsters, or mount after market equipment on
or behind them.

61
L

Airbag SRS
INTRODUCTION Airbag SRS warning indicator
The airbag supplementary restraint system A warning indicator mounted in
(SRS) incorporates front airbags, seat mounted the instrument pack will alert you
side airbags and curtain airbags for the driver to any malfunction of the airbag
and front passenger and curtain airbags for the SRS. See Warning Indicators, 93. The airbag
rear seat outboard passengers (see illustration SRS should always be checked by a Land Rover
for airbag locations). These are indicated by the Dealer if any of the following symptoms occurs:
word AIRBAG on the trim. • The warning indicator fails to illuminate
Provided occupants are correctly seated, with when the starter switch is turned to
seat belts properly worn, the airbags will position ll.
provide additional protection to the chest and • The warning indicator fails to extinguish
facial areas of the front seat occupants in the within approximately four seconds after the
event of the vehicle receiving a severe frontal starter switch is turned to position ll.
impact, and also to the side of the body facing • The warning indicator illuminates after the
the impact, if a severe side collision occurs. engine is started, or while the vehicle is
In the event of a side collision or a roll-over, being driven.
curtain airbags will afford additional protection When the starter switch is turned to
to the side of the head facing the impact for the position II, the diagnostic control unit
front seat and outer rear seat occupants. monitors the readiness of the system’s
electrical circuits. The elements of the
system being monitored include:
• SRS warning indicator
• Rotary coupler
• Airbag modules
• Seat belt pre-tensioners
• Airbag diagnostic control unit
• Crash sensors
• Airbag wiring harnesses
• Seat occupancy sensor

62
R

Airbag SRS
HOW THE AIRBAG SRS WORKS Dual stage deployment
In the event of a collision, the airbag control The front airbags deploy in two stages,
unit monitors the rate of deceleration induced depending on the severity of the frontal
by the collision, to determine whether the collision. The unit monitors the rate of
airbags should be deployed. deceleration during the impact.
Operation of the airbag SRS is dependent on In a moderately severe frontal impact, the
the rate at which the vehicle's passenger airbags inflate sufficiently to protect the front
compartment changes speed as a result of a seat passengers and reduce the risk of injury.
collision. The circumstances affecting different The driver’s seat has a seat position switch,
collisions (vehicle speed, angle of impact, type which governs the deployment of the driver’s
and size of object hit, for example), vary dual stage front airbag. The sensor detects the
considerably and will affect the rate of fore-aft position of the seat and selects the level
deceleration accordingly. of driver airbag deployment between a full
Note: The airbag SRS is not designed to energy deployment or a reduced energy
operate as a result of: deployment, if deployment is required.
• rear collisions. In a severe frontal impact, the airbags will fully
inflate thereby providing maximum protection
• minor front impacts.
unless the driver’s seat additional sensor
• minor side impacts. determines that a reduced power deployment is
• heavy braking. required.
• driving over bumps and potholes. Airbag inflation is virtually instantaneous and
However, if as a result of an impact, you believe occurs with considerable force, accompanied
the airbags should have deployed and they by a loud noise. The inflated bag, together with
failed to do so, please call 1(800)637-6837 for the seat belt restraint system, limit the
advice, or arrange for a Land Rover movement of an occupant, thereby reducing
representative to inspect the vehicle to the risk of injury to the head and upper torso.
determine whether the system operated In the case of a severe frontal collision, both
correctly. front airbags will be deployed. In the case of a
It follows, therefore, that significant superficial severe side collision, only the seat mounted
damage can occur without the airbags side airbags and curtain airbags on the
deploying or, conversely, that a relatively small impacted side of the vehicle will inflate.
amount of structural damage may cause the However, there may also be impact conditions
airbags to be deployed. whereby one set of side and both front airbags
deploy at the same time, or where front and
side airbags respond separately as a result of a
secondary impact occurring after the initial
collision has taken place.

63
L

Airbag SRS
Front mounted airbags Side and curtain airbags

WARNING
For the curtain airbags to deploy correctly,
the roof lining and A post trim must be
undamaged and fitted correctly. Any damage
or suspect fitting should be referred to a Land
Rover Dealer for examination.

H6027L

Note: Airbags will only deploy when they are


required to supplement the restraining force of
the front seat belts.

H6663L

Curtain airbags are designed to protect the


head in the event of a severe side impact or
roll-over event. They will NOT inflate as a result
of frontal or rear impacts alone.
The curtain airbag modules are located behind
the roof lining and pillar finisher, above the
doors. In the event of a severe side collision, the
airbag pushes out from behind the roof lining
and pillar finisher as it inflates. The curtain
airbag remains inflated for longer than the other
airbags, to provide additional head protection in
the event of a secondary impact/vehicle
roll-over.

64
R

Airbag SRS
Deployment effects Obstruction of airbags
After inflation, the front and seat mounted side
WARNING
airbags deflate immediately (curtain airbags
Do not allow passengers to obstruct the
deflate slowly). This provides a gradual
operation of the airbags by placing feet,
cushioning effect for the occupant and also
knees or any other part of the person, or any
ensures that the driver's forward vision is not
other objects in contact with, or in close
obscured.
proximity to, an airbag module.
WARNING DO NOT attach or position items on, or close
When an airbag inflates, a fine powder is to the roof lining, A, B and C post finishers,
released. This is not an indication of a front seat backs or to an airbag cover, which
malfunction. However, the powder may cause could interfere with the inflation of the airbag
irritation to the skin and should be thoroughly or, if the airbag inflates, be propelled inside
flushed from the eyes and any cuts or the vehicle causing injury to the occupants.
abrasions of the skin.
Following inflation, some airbag SRS To ensure correct deployment of the airbags, it
components are hot - DO NOT touch until they is essential that obstructions are not allowed to
have cooled. intervene between an airbag and the occupant.
The following are examples of the type of
obstructions that could either, impede correct
WARNING operation of the airbags, or jeopardise personal
Even with airbag SRS equipment fitted, seat safety in the event of an airbag deployment:
belts must ALWAYS be worn because:
• An airbag will only provide additional A B C
protection in certain types of frontal
collisions. NO protection is afforded
against the effects of rear impacts, or
minor frontal impacts.
• Inflation and deflation take place
instantaneously and will not provide
protection against the effects of
secondary impacts that can occur during
multiple vehicle collisions.
H6607N

• Accessories attached to or obscuring an


airbag cover, including; the roof lining, A, B
and C post finishers and the seat backs of
the front seats.
• Items of hand luggage, or other objects
placed on an airbag cover.

65
L

Airbag SRS
• Feet, knees or any other part of the Occupant detection
anatomy in contact with, or in close The front passenger seat is fitted with an
proximity to, an airbag cover. occupancy detection system that determines if
• Head, arms or any part of the anatomy in the seat is unoccupied, occupied by a person of
contact with, or in close proximity to, a seat low weight, a child seat or object, or is occupied
mounted side airbag. by a heavier person or object.
• Items of clothing hanging from the grab The system consists of:
handle attached to the roof. • A weight sensing pressure pad installed
• Items of clothing or cushions draped over under the front passenger seat cushion.
the part of the front seat containing the The sensor measures downwards
airbag. pressure/weight on the seat cushion.
• Non-approved seat covers/accessory seat • A seat belt tension sensor integrated into
covers over a front seat; in particular, seat the anchor point of the front passenger
covers that have not been designed for use seat belt.
with side airbag. If in doubt, consult your • A control unit installed under the front
Land Rover Dealer. passenger seat.
Caution: If a non-approved phone system is to • An airbag status indicator lamp, mounted
be fitted, ensure that the installer is aware of on the instrument panel.
the SRS system.
The system will adjust the passenger airbag
Note: Unauthorised modification of the vehicle status and operate the status indicator as
or parts may invalidate the vehicle’s warranty. follows:
Disability modifications
Occupants with disabilities that may require the Seat Passenger Status
vehicle to be modified must contact a Land occupancy airbag status indicator
Rover Dealer before any modifications are status active
made. Completely Deactivated No†
empty
Low weight Deactivated Yes
occupant/
child seat/
object
Heavy Activated No
occupant/
object

The operational status indicator is located on


the passenger’s side of the instrument panel.

66
R

Airbag SRS

It is possible to receive an intermittent Operational status indicator
indicator with an empty seat condition. This is
part of the system’s adaptive behaviour, and
does not affect the status of the passenger
airbag. However, if the indicator becomes
permanently illuminated when the seat is
definitely empty, or when an adult occupant is PASS
AIRBAG
OFF

seated then contact your Land Rover Dealer 1 2


ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

4 5 6

immediately.
GHI JKL MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

WARNING
Do not use a child restraint on a seat
protected by an operational airbag in front of
it. PASS
There is a risk of death or serious injury when AIRBAG
the airbag deploys. OFF
The safest place for children is properly
restrained in the rear seats.
H6035N

The passenger airbag operational status


indicator is an oblong lamp which illuminates
yellow when the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
The indicator will illuminate when the starter
key is turned to position ll and the airbag is
deactivated.

WARNING
When checking the status of the airbag using
the operational status lamp, always ensure
that the starter key is in position ll.

67
L

Airbag SRS
SERVICE INFORMATION WARNING
WARNING For your safety it is recommended that you
seek the assistance of a Land Rover Dealer to
DO NOT attempt to service, repair, replace,
carry out any of the following:
modify or tamper with any part of the airbag
SRS, or wiring in the vicinity of an airbag SRS • Removal or repair of any wiring or
component; this could cause the system to component in the vicinity of any of the
activate, resulting in personal injury. SRS components, including the steering
wheel, steering column, door trim, roof
In addition, ALWAYS contact your Land Rover lining, instrument pack and instrument
Dealer if: panel.
• an airbag inflates. • Installation of electronic equipment such
as a mobile phone, two-way radio or
• the front or side of the vehicle is damaged,
in-car entertainment system.
even if the airbag has not inflated.
• Modification to the front or side of the
• any part of an airbag module cover shows
vehicle, including the bumper and
signs of cracking or damage.
chassis.
• any trim containing airbags - front seat
• Attachment of accessories to the front or
back, headlining or pillar trims - becomes
side of the vehicle.
damaged.
Caution: The components that make up the
Disposing of vehicles
airbag SRS are sensitive to electrical or
physical interference, either of which could If you sell your vehicle, be sure to inform the
easily damage the system and cause new owner that the vehicle has an airbag SRS.
inadvertent operation or a malfunction of the If your vehicle is to be scrapped; uninflated
airbag. airbags are potentially very dangerous and
must be safely deployed in a controlled
environment by qualified personnel, before a
vehicle is scrapped.

68
R

Steering Column
Steering Column

STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT


WARNING
DO NOT adjust the steering wheel position
while the vehicle is in motion. This is
extremely dangerous! AUTO

The steering wheel position can be adjusted in


two directions.
Move the lever located under the steering wheel
fully downwards (see inset).
Adjust the steering wheel up or down, in or out.
Move the lever fully up to lock.

WARNING
Ensure that the lever is fully up. Inadvertent
movement of the wheel might occur if the
lever is not fully tightened.

H6364L

69
L

Door Mirrors
Door Mirrors

EXTERIOR MIRRORS The door mirrors have integral heating


elements which disperse ice or mist from the
Caution: Objects viewed in exterior mirrors
glass. These will operate automatically with the
may appear further away than they actually
starter switch in position II and are controlled
are.
according to the external temperature and
Mirror adjustment wiper status.
Note: On vehicles fitted with the driver’s seat
memory facility, up to three exterior mirror
positions for each of three possible remote
controls can be stored. See DRIVER’S SEAT
MEMORY FACILITY, 46.
Folding the mirror body
The door mirrors are designed to fold forwards
or rearwards on impact. They can also be folded
in towards the side windows into a park
position.This operation is carried out by
physically pushing the mirror bodies towards
the side windows.

H6044L

With the starter switch turned to position l or II,


rotate the knob to select either the left or
right-hand mirror. Push the knob in the
appropriate direction to tilt the mirror glass
up/down/left or right
H6048L

H6384L

70
R

Door Mirrors
Reverse mirror dipping
Vehicles with driver’s seat memory have a
pre-stored function, which allows the door
mirrors to dip whenever reverse gear is
selected, giving the driver a view of the
curbside.
When this feature is first turned on, the mirrors
will dip to a preset amount. See SELECTING
SETTINGS OPTION, 77. The degree of dipping
can be programmed using the following
sequence:
1. Insert the starter key and turn it to position
I or ll. Do not start the engine.
2. Adjust the seat and the exterior mirrors to
the correct position and perform a
memory-store routine. See Setting a
memory pre-set, 46.
3. Select reverse gear - the mirrors will dip to
a preset level.
4. Adjust the mirrors to the required dipped
position.
5. Perform a memory-store sequence.
6. DOOR MIRROR DIP STORED will be
displayed on the message center.
7. A single chime will sound from the
instrument pack.
This feature can be enabled or disabled
by a Land Rover Dealer or by the driver.
See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION,
77.

71
L

Facia Controls
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

FACIA CONTROLS

AUTO

1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

72
21
14
Facia Controls

AUTO

18

23 22 19 17
20 15

H5916N
16
R

Facia Controls
FACIA CONTROLS KEY
1. High/low beam and direction/turn indicator
controls
2. Cruise control switches
3. Tachometer
4. Temperature gauge
5. Horn buttons
6. Fuel gauge
7. Speedometer
8. Audio remote controls
9. Wash/wipe controls
10. Heater/air conditioning controls
11. Hazard warning lamp switch
12. Door lock/unlock switch
13. Audio display/controls
14. Gear selector
15. Transfer gearbox switch
16. Hill Descent Control switch
17. Display screen
18. Electric parkbrake switch
19. Terrain ResponseTM control switch
20. Air suspension switch
21. Starter switch
22. Dimmer control
23. Lamps master switch

73
L

Instruments
Instruments

INSTRUMENT PACK

1 2 3 4

EXT 72 F

H6054N 9 8 7 6 5

1. Tachometer
Indicates engine speed in revolutions per
minute (x 1000). In normal driving conditions
the engine is most fuel efficient between 2000
and 3000 rev/min.
2. Temperature gauge
At normal operating temperature, the pointer
will be positioned midway between the RED and
BLUE segments of the gauge (the precise
position will vary according to climatic
H6055G
conditions).
If the pointer moves above the mid point, the Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and
engine coolant is becoming too hot. Should the switch off the engine and allow to cool down. If
pointer move INTO the RED segment and the the problem persists, seek qualified assistance
RED warning indicator within the gauge before continuing.
illuminates, severe engine damage could occur
(under these circumstances, the air
conditioning may switch off and engine
performance may reduce in order to minimise
engine load).

74
R

Instruments
3. Fuel gauge 6. Trip recorder reset switch
When the starter switch is turned to position II, With the starter switch in position ll, pressing
the pointer quickly rises to show the level of fuel this button resets the trip recorder to zero.
in the tank.
7. Gear selector position display
When the remaining fuel reaches a minimum of
The current gear selector position is displayed.
12 litres (3 gallons) on petrol vehicles, the
See GEAR SELECTOR DISPLAY, 91, for further
AMBER low fuel warning indicator in the fuel
information.
gauge illuminates.
8. Main message center
Displays all warning and information
messages. For further information concerning
messages and their meanings, refer to MAIN
MESSAGE CENTER, 79.
9. Tachometer indicators panel
Displays four system status indicators.

H6056G

The remaining fuel should give a range of


approximately 80 km (50 miles).
The small arrow visible alongside the fuel pump
symbol on the gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle on which the fuel filler is located - a
useful reminder to help you position the vehicle
on the correct side of the gasoline pumps
before refuelling.
Caution: NEVER allow vehicles to run out of
fuel as the resultant misfire may damage the
catalytic converter.
4. Speedometer
Indicates road speed.
5. Total distance (odometer) and trip recorder
Indicates the total distance travelled, and also
shows the most recent individual journey
distance. See ODOMETER DISPLAY, 92.

75
L

Trip Computer
Trip Computer

TRIP COMPUTER - A series of short presses of the button (less


FUNCTION SELECTION than two seconds) will scroll through the
following:

EXT 73 F

TRIP 134.5 MILES


RANGE 246 MILES

AV.
FUEL 17.4 MPG
AV.
SPEED 45 MPH
H6059N OVERSPEED WARNING
65 MPH
The trip computer function can be set to give a
wide range of information, with the units used
by the displays being chosen by the driver. EXT 72 F
The system is also used to display any warning
messages generated by the vehicle’s
self-checking facility.
TRIP 134.5 MILES
At engine start-up, the main message center
H6062N
shows SYSTEM CHECK IN PROGRESS. When
this check is completed, the screen will show • Available range (with current fuel tank
the outside temperature. If the vehicle is in contents).
motion, the screen will also show the trip
• Average fuel consumption.
distance, using the last used units.
• Average speed.
Trip computer statistics can be viewed by
pressing the i button on the end of the • The option to activate/de-activate the
direction/turn indicator stalk. overspeed warning function (a long press
of the button turns the function on or off).
A long press of the button (over two seconds)
will zero the trip distance recorder which will • A review of active warning messages.
then start to record distance from that point. • A blank trip computer window (screen
shows outside temperature).
• Settings option menu.
• A display of trip distance.

76
R

Settings Option
Settings Option

SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION


Various vehicle functions can be selected to
suit personal requirements. These can be set by
the driver.

MODE

3
SETTINGS
4
ENTER
EXIT
1
2

TRIP DISTANCE
UNITS
KM
NEXT
H6063G EXIT BACK
With the starter key in any position, but with the
vehicle stationary and a blank screen displayed, H6064G

a short press (less than two seconds) on the i Move through the Settings menu by pressing
button on the end of the direction/turn indicator buttons 1 or 2, and make choices by pressing
stalk brings up the SETTINGS display. buttons 3 or 4.
Once this screen is displayed, pressing button When you have finished making adjustments, a
1 gives access to the menu of options that can short press (less than two seconds) on the i
be personalised. button will return you to the trip computer
display.

77
L

Settings Option

SETTINGS CHOICE
TRIP DISTANCE UNITS (odometer) MILES/KM
FUEL USAGE UNITS MPG
l/100km
Km/l
oC or oF
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE
OVERSPEED WARNING Off
(Set a personal speed limit - Warnings are 20 - 250 km/h or 15 to 140 mph in 5-unit steps
displayed in the message center) (Units set as trip distance)
HEADLAMP OFF DELAY 30/60/120/240 seconds
AUTO DOOR LOCK (speed related locking) ON/OFF
REVERSE MIRROR DIP† ON/OFF
LAZY ENTRY ON/OFF
RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS YES/NO

†This
feature is dependent on having driver’s Lazy entry
seat memory. This option includes memory driving seat and
Confirming choices electric mirrors. Positions set in the seat
memory will be re-established when the remote
After making any changes to the Settings
control associated with a particular setting is
options, press the i button again to save
used to unlock the vehicle. See DRIVER’S SEAT
settings and exit.
MEMORY FACILITY, 46, and EXTERIOR
Note: If the vehicle is moved while any changes MIRRORS, 70.
are being made to the Settings options, the
system will prevent any further input until the Key memory
vehicle is stationary again. All of the choices made during Settings are
stored within the vehicles memory. The choices
are referenced to the remote control that was
used during the process.
These choices are recalled when the vehicle is
next unlocked using that remote control.

78
R

Message Center
Message Center

MAIN MESSAGE CENTER Warnings and information messages


Warning messages are non-critical, but must
be treated with some urgency. They will also be
accompanied by an audible warning each time
the message is displayed.
DO NOT ignore these messages - TAKE
EXT 23 C CORRECTIVE ACTION AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
Warning messages are displayed for
approximately 20 seconds. If other warning
messages are pending, the display time will be
reduced to approximately 2 seconds.
If the symbol is displayed in the main
message center, there are current warning
messages that are waiting to be reviewed.
LOW WASHER FLUID
Review the messages by pressing the i button
on the direction/turn indicator stalk.
Information messages will be displayed as and
H6065G when applicable, and also when the starter
switch is turned on or off. Where the message
Driver warning and information messages are
requires action by the driver - TAKE
displayed in the main message center.
CORRECTIVE ACTION AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
They are displayed when a fault is detected and
Messages are displayed in order of importance
also when the starter switch is turned off. It is
with critical warnings taking priority.
possible, by pressing the system check control
switch, to view messages for up to 3 minutes
after the key has been removed from the starter
switch.
Messages have different priority levels and are
grouped into the following categories.
Critical warning messages
Critical warning messages are accompanied by
an audible warning and the warning may have
the handbook symbol next to it. DO NOT ignore
these messages - TAKE CORRECTIVE ACTION
IMMEDIATELY! These messages are displayed
continuously while the starter switch is turned
on, and remain displayed while the fault
persists.

79
L

Message Center
Languages
The language displayed in the main message
center is a dealer configurable feature.
The languages supported are:
• English
• English US
• French
• German
• Italian
• Spanish
If your vehicle has the navigation option, the
language you select for navigation display will
also be displayed in the main message center if
it is one of the supported languages in the
above list. If the main message center does not
support the selected navigation language,
English will be displayed.

80
R

Message Center
MESSAGE CENTER - MESSAGES
The following table is a comprehensive list of all messages that could appear in the message center.
Market criteria mean that some messages will not apply to your vehicle and will therefore not appear.

Message Meaning What to do?


AAA.A M BBB.B M Trip computer information. No action required.
C.C Mph D.D Mpg
AIRBAG FAULT Fault in supplementary Seek qualified assistance
restraint system. immediately.
AVERAGE CONS. Trip computer information. No action required.
RESET MPG L/100KM
AVERAGE SPEED Trip computer information. No action required.
RESET MILES KM
CANNOT EDIT Driver has attempted to access Stop the vehicle before entering
ON THE MOVE the Settings menu when the Settings menu.
vehicle is moving.
CAUTION Parkbrake has been applied Only use this function in an
PARKBRAKE while the vehicle is moving. emergency.
APPLIED
CAUTION! Displayed when the Terrain Raise suspension manually to
RISK OF Response system would off-road height if possible and
GROUNDING WITH normally have provided appropriate.
SUSPENSION AT off-road height but the driver
NORMAL HEIGHT has manually lowered the
vehicle (or the system cannot
raise the vehicle).
CHECK PRESSURE OF ALL One or more of your tires are You should stop as soon as
TIRES significantly under-inflated. possible, check your tires and
inflate them to the recommended
pressure.
CHECK Brake fluid in reservoir below Seek qualified assistance
BRAKE FLUID recommended level. immediately.
CHECK Brake pads worn beyond the Seek qualified assistance
BRAKE PADS service limit. immediately.
CHECK SPARE TIRE Your spare tire is significantly You should inflate the spare tire
PRESSURE under-inflated. to the recommended pressure.
COOLING SYSTEM Low coolant level If below lower mark, seek
FAULT qualified assistance.
MONITOR GAUGE
CRUISE Driver has switched off cruise No action required.
CANCELLED control.

81
L

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
DRIVER Driver is pressing the Nothing, message will clear when
OVERIDE accelerator pedal during cruise the driver releases the
control. accelerator, then cruise control
will resume.
CRUISE System not available due to Consult your Land Rover Dealer.
NOT AVAILABLE system fault.
CRUISE CONTROL System fault or vehicle Consult cruise control section of
NOT PERMITTED operating parameters outside handbook for guidance.
threshold for operation of
cruise control.
SET SPEED Speed set for Adaptive Cruise No action required.
XXX MPH KM/H Control.
CRUISE GAP Adaptive Cruise Control set Adjust to required distance.
<--> distance (time gap). (4 settings).
ACC SENSOR Adaptive Cruise Control field of Check to make sure nothing is
BLOCKED view may be obstructed. covering the ACC sensor.
FWD ALERT Forward alert feature has been No action required.
ON (or OFF) turned on or off.
FWD ALERT Forward alert sensitivity Adjust to required sensitivity.
<----> adjustment. (4 settings).
DOOR MIRROR DIP Memory system - confirmation No action required.
STORED that memory has stored driver
information.
DRIVER Alert that action by the driver to If required, the driver should
INTERVENE apply the brakes is required. apply the brakes.
DRIVER OVERSPEED Trip computer information. No action required.
SET CLEAR
DRIVER’S Driver’s door open or not fully Close driver’s door.
DOOR OPEN closed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control To reselect, press DSC switch.
SWITCHED OFF system not available - switched
off by driver.
ENGINE SYSTEM FAULT Engine management system Avoid high speeds and consult
registers a serious fault - your Land Rover Dealer.
reduced performance may be
experienced.
ENGINE SYSTEM The relevant service interval Arrange as soon as possible.
SERVICE REQUIRED has elapsed and your vehicle
requires servicing.

82
R

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
FASTEN Seat occupied and seat belt not Fasten seat belt.
SEAT BELTS fastened.
“Wheel position” You have a temporary spare You should limit your speed to
TIRE PRESSURE NOT tire fitted in the corresponding 80 km/h (50 mph). Replace the
MONITORED position. temporary spare as soon as
For example:- possible with a correctly inflated
full sized spare.
FRONT LEFT TIRE The TPMS sensor at the Seek qualified assistance as soon
PRESSURE NOT corresponding wheel is not as possible.
MONITORED operating correctly. It may be
that an unapproved accessory
has been fitted which is
causing interference with the
signal, a wheel has been fitted
which does not have a sensor,
or a fault with the sensor itself.
GRASS GRAVEL If you leave the rotary knob in No action required.
SNOW this position then you will
activate the highlighted Terrain
Response special program.
GRASS GRAVEL The rotary knob has been left in No action required.
SNOW one position for longer than
PROGRAM SELECTED two seconds and Grass Gravel
Snow special program has
been activated.
HDC FAULT Hill Descent Control system Drive with care and do not
SYSTEM fault. attempt to descend steep slopes.
NOT AVAILABLE Seek qualified assistance
immediately.
HDC HDC not operative because of Select correct gear if HDC is
NOT AVAILABLE incorrect gear selection. HDC is required. In LOW range, HDC
IN THIS GEAR fully functional in 1, R and D in operates in all gears.
HIGH range. It operates in all
gears in LOW range.
HDC HDC unavailable, speed Reduce vehicle speed.
NOT AVAILABLE threshold exceeded. Max HDC
SPEED TOO HIGH operating speed is 50 km/h (30
mph), max speed for HDC
selection is 80 km/h (50 mph).

83
L

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
HDC HDC switched off by driver, No action required.
SWITCHED OFF Terrain Response system or
speed threshold exceeded.
HDC TEMPORARILY HDC switched off while brake Wait until message disappears
NOT AVAILABLE system is cooling. before attempting to descend
SYSTEM COOLING steep slopes.
HIGH ENGINE SPEED Engine idle speed increasing to No action required.
FOR COOLING improve cooling and/or air
conditioning performance.
HIGH/LOW RANGE Advises driver that transfer box No action required.
SELECTED has engaged either HIGH or
LOW range.
INTERIOR LIGHTS Courtesy lamps can only be No action required.
OFF operated manually, and will not
illuminate when a door is
opened.
INTERIOR LIGHTS All courtesy lamps have been No action required.
AUTOMATIC enabled.
KEY BATTERY Remote control battery charge Insert key in starter switch and
LOW PLACE low. start the engine to recharge the
KEY IN IGNITION remote control battery.
TO CHARGE
LOW Coolant level in header tank Top up with correct mixture of
COOLANT LEVEL below recommended level. antifreeze and water at the
earliest opportunity. If the
problem persists, consult your
Land Rover Dealer.
LOW WASHER FLUID Washer fluid quantity below 1 Top up washer fluid.
litre.
MEMORY 1/2/3 Memory system - confirmation No action required.
STORED/SELECTED that memory has been
stored/selected.
MUD RUTS If you leave the rotary knob in No action required.
this position then you will
activate the highlighted Terrain
Response special program.
MUD RUTS The rotary knob has been left in No action required.
PROGRAM SELECTED one position for longer than
two seconds and Mud Ruts
special program has been
activated.

84
R

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
PARKBRAKE A garage technician has If not required, an ignition reset
BEDDING CYCLE requested a bedding cycle. will cancel the function.
ACTIVE
PARKBRAKE FAULT Supports the yellow warning Seek qualified assistance
indicator - electric parkbrake immediately.
functions may not be available.
PARKBRAKE FAULT Drive-away release function is Use manual release.
AUTO RELEASE not available.
NOT FUNCTIONAL
PARKBRAKE FAULT Supports the red warning Seek qualified assistance
SYSTEM indicator - electric parkbrake immediately.
NOT FUNCTIONAL functions are not available.
PARKBRAKE FAULT Electric parkbrake has lost Follow the instructions to park
TO HOLD VEHICLE vehicle speed information. the vehicle.
REMOVE KEY THEN
APPLY PARKBRAKE
PARKBRAKE OFF An emergency release Once original faults have been
LIFT SWITCH operation is detected. corrected, apply the switch to
TO APPLY reinstate electric parkbrake.
PARK LOCK Automatic transmission park Seek qualified assistance
FAILURE lock function ineffective due to immediately.
APPLY HANDBRAKE transfer box being out of HIGH
or LOW range.
PRESS FOOTBRAKE A switch release has been Follow the instructions to achieve
AND PARKBRAKE detected without brake pedal a manual release.
SWITCH contact.
TO RELEASE
PROGRAM CHANGE Conditions prevail which make Be patient. If conditions change
IN PROGRESS it temporarily impossible to within 60 seconds, the chosen
select a new program. This can program will be activated.
be due to ABS or DSC activity If the message is prompted by
or the overheating of the electronic differential overheat,
electronic differentials. then it will take longer but there
will be separate advice about this.
Once the differentials have cooled
and this advice is no longer
present, try to reselect the
required special program.
RANGE Trip computer information. No action required.
MILES/KM

85
L

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
RECOMMEND LOW range is usually better for Select LOW range if required.
LOW RANGE Mud-Ruts special program.
IS SELECTED
FOR MUD-RUTS
PROGRAM
RECOMMEND RAISING In deep ruts it is beneficial to Raise suspension manually to
SUSPENSION TO raise the vehicle to off-road off-road height.
OFF ROAD HEIGHT height. This is done
IN DEEP MUD-RUTS automatically in LOW range but
has to be done manually if
mud/ruts program is used in
HIGH range.
RECOMMEND STARTING For slippery conditions it can Select second/third gear.
IN be beneficial to start off in a
2ND/3RD GEAR higher gear than usual.
FOR SLIPPERY
CONDITIONS
REDUCED Engine management system Avoid high speeds and consult
ENGINE registers a serious fault - your Land Rover Dealer.
PERFORMANCE reduced engine performance
may be experienced.
RESET SUSPENSION Suspension still in extended Check if vehicle is clear of
HEIGHT IF CLEAR mode. obstacle. If clear, select required
OF OBSTACLE suspension.
ROCK CRAWL If you leave the rotary knob in No action required.
this position then you will
activate the highlighted Terrain
Response special program.
ROCK CRAWL The rotary knob has been left in No action required.
PROGRAM SELECTED one position for longer than
two seconds and Rock Crawl
special program has been
activated.
SAND If you leave the rotary knob in No action required.
this position then you will
activate the highlighted Terrain
Response special program.
SAND The rotary knob has been left in No action required.
PROGRAM SELECTED one position for longer than
two seconds and Sand special
program has been activated.

86
R

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
SELECT LOW RANGE Vehicle is not in LOW range, so Select LOW range if Rock Crawl is
TO ACTIVATE Rock Crawl cannot be required.
ROCK CRAWL activated.
SELECT NEUTRAL Alerts driver that range change Select neutral.
FOR RANGE will not occur until neutral is
CHANGE selected on the transmission.
SLOW DOWN OR VEHICLE Vehicle will automatically Choose to slow down or accept
WILL LOWER/RAISE lower/raise if vehicle speed height change.
increases.
SPECIAL You have deselected a Terrain No action required.
PROGRAMS OFF Response special program and
the general program has now
been activated.
SPEED TOO HIGH Driver has requested range Reduce speed to 40 km/h
FOR RANGE change when vehicle speed is (25 mph).
CHANGE too high.
SUSPENSION Access height selected. No action required.
ACCESS HEIGHT
SELECTED
SUSPENSION Air suspension height change Close all doors.
CLOSE DOOR is prevented because a door is
TO CHANGE HEIGHT open.
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the Seek qualified assistance
air suspension system. System immediately.
may still operate normally.
SUSPENSION FAULT A major fault has been detected Drive slowly until fault can be
MAX SPEED 50 KM/H in the air suspension system. rectified.
(MAX SPEED 30 MPH) Height cannot be controlled.
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the Seek qualified assistance
NORMAL HEIGHT ONLY air suspension system. Only immediately.
normal height is available.
SUSPENSION FAULT Major component failure. Stop vehicle immediately and
STOP SAFELY seek qualified assistance.
STOP ENGINE
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the Drive slowly and take additional
VEHICLE LEAN WHEN Dynamic Response system. care until fault can be fixed. Seek
CORNERING qualified assistance immediately.
SUSPENSION Vehicle body has become No action required.
IN EXTENDED trapped on an obstacle and will
MODE raise automatically.

87
L

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
SUSPENSION Crawl mode selected and No action required.
LOCKED AT suspension locked.
ACCESS HEIGHT
SUSPENSION Normal height selected. No action required.
NORMAL HEIGHT
SELECTED
SUSPENSION A height change has been Reduce vehicle speed.
SPEED TOO HIGH requested but is prevented
TO CHANGE HEIGHT because speed is too high.
SUSPENSION Vehicle height can only be Start the engine.
START ENGINE raised with the engine running.
TO RAISE VEHICLE
SUSPENSION Vehicle is raising slowly No action required.
VEHICLE RAISING because reservoir is empty.
SLOWLY (Only displayed if lift time
exceeds 12 seconds. This is
NOT a system fault.)
SUSPENSION Air suspension compressor is Wait for suspension to carry out
WILL RAISE WHEN cooling. Lifting will resume lifting sequence.
SYSTEM COOLED when compressor has cooled.
SYSTEM CHECK Instrument cluster internal No action required.
IN PROGRESS diagnostic routine.
SYSTEM FAULT Some Terrain Response special Be careful going off-road as
SOME PROGRAMS programs are not available Terrain Response may not
NOT AVAILABLE because of a system fault. function in the program
required.Seek qualified
assistance immediately.
SYSTEM FAULT There is a fault on the vehicle Be careful going off-road as
SPECIAL PROGRAMS which makes the Terrain Terrain Response cannot
NOT AVAILABLE Response special programs function in any of its special
unavailable. programs.
Get the vehicle checked and
rectified.
TERRAIN RESPONSE If you leave the Terrain No action required.
SPECIAL PROGRAMS OFF Response rotary knob in this
position, you will activate the
general program and any active
Terrain Response special
program will be deselected.

88
R

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
TIRE PRESSURE You have fitted wheels and tires You should have TPMS sensors
MONITORING SYSTEM which do not have TPMS fitted to the wheels and tires as
FAULT sensors. soon as possible.
TPMS sensors have become Seek qualified assistance as soon
defective, an unapproved as possible.
accessory is intefering with the
TPMS or a general fault has
been detected in the TPMS.
TRAILER CONNECTED Advisory message that vehicle If a trailer is connected, do
OFF ROAD HEIGHT has not selected off-road height nothing, as it may not be safe to
NOT SELECTED as trailer socket is being used. raise the vehicle to off-road
AUTOMATICALLY height.
If no trailer is connected
electrically but something else is,
such as a bike rack, then the
vehicle can be raised to off-road
height manually.
If nothing is connected, then the
socket needs checking for faults.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that automatic Seek qualified assistance
FAULT transmission has a fault. immediately.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that an Seek qualified assistance
FAULT AND automatic transmission fault immediately.
OVERHEAT has occurred and the
temperature is too high.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that automatic Seek qualified assistance
FAULT LIMITED transmission has a fault and immediately.
GEARS AVAILABLE performance may be affected.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
FAULT occurred with the electronic safe to do so.
STOP SAFELY rear differential.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Reduce speed and seek qualified
FAULT occurred with the transfer box assistance immediately.
TRACTION REDUCED control system. Note: Off-road performance will
be reduced.
TRANSMISSION Rear differential temperature Reduce speed and seek qualified
OVERHEAT has reached or is approaching assistance immediately.
SLOW DOWN the overheat threshold.

89
L

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Reduce speed and seek qualified
RANGE CHANGE occurred which prevents the assistance immediately.
NOT AVAILABLE transfer box from changing
range.
TRANSMISSION Transfer box control module Reduce speed and seek qualified
TRACTION fault. assistance immediately.
REDUCED
TRIP DIST RANGE Trip computer information. No action required.
AVE SP. AVE CONS.
TRIP DISTANCE Trip computer information. No action required.
RESET MILES KM

90
R

Message Center
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR GEAR SELECTOR DISPLAY

H6066G H6068G

The service interval indicator is a market This shows the current gear lever position and
configurable feature and may not be enabled. If indicates when LOW range has been selected.
the feature is enabled, the display will become The LOW range indicator (in the top right
active when a pre-determined distance or time corner of the display) flashes whilst the transfer
before service is reached. These box changes ranges and then illuminates
pre-determined values are market dependent. constantly when LOW range has engaged. A
When the starter switch is turned to position I range change will also be confirmed in the main
and the pre-determined value is reached, a message center.
distance countdown to the next service appears
in the display. A minus sign preceding the
distance indicates that the service interval point
has been exceeded by that distance.
After approximately five seconds, the display
reverts to show the total distance travelled.
Note: After the completion of each service, the
Land Rover Dealer will reset the distance
display for the countdown to the next service.

91
L

Message Center
ODOMETER DISPLAY

H6572R

With the starter switch turned to position II, the


display indicates the total distance travelled by
the vehicle, and also shows the most recent
individual journey distance. See SELECTING
SETTINGS OPTION, 77. Pressing the trip
recorder reset button (see inset), resets the trip
recorder to zero.

92
R

Warning Indicators
Warning Indicators

INDICATOR GROUPING

H6585N

Caution: RED warning indicators are of BACKGROUND


particular importance; their illumination Direction/turn indicators - GREEN
indicates that a fault exists. If a RED warning An indicator flashes in time with
indicator illuminates, stop the vehicle safely the corresponding left or right
and review the specific instructions given in direction/turn indicator lamps
this section. whenever they are operated. If the warning
The location and specification of the warning indicator fails to flash, or flashes very rapidly,
indicators may vary according to model and this may indicate a bulb failure in one of the
market requirements. direction/turn indicator lamps.
For ease of identification, the warning indicator If the hazard switch is pressed, both warning
descriptions have been grouped into the five indicators will flash in conjunction with the
locations on the instrument pack. direction/turn indicator lamps.
These are: Trailer - GREEN
• background The indicator illuminates as a bulb
• tachometer check when the starter switch is
turned to position II and
• fuel/temperature gauge
extinguishes when the engine is started.
• message center
If a trailer is attached to the vehicle and the
• speedometer direction/turn indicators are used, this indicator
will flash in synchronisation with the
direction/turn indicator lamps. If it does not
flash, this indicates that a trailer bulb is
defective.

93
L

Warning Indicators
TACHOMETER DISPLAY Seat belt - RED
Illuminates when the starter
Battery charging - RED
switch is turned to position II and
Illuminates as a bulb check when extinguishes after approximately 6
the starter switch is turned to seconds, even if the driver's seat belt remains
position II and extinguishes once unfastened. In some markets illumination of the
the engine is running. If it remains on, or indicator will be accompanied by a warning
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the chime. See AUDIBLE WARNINGS, 98.
battery charging system is indicated. Seek
Note: In certain markets, the indicator will
qualified assistance urgently.
illuminate until the driver’s seat belt is fastened
Low oil pressure - RED correctly.
Illuminates as a bulb check when Airbag SRS - RED
the starter switch is turned to
The indicator illuminates when the
position II and extinguishes when
starter switch is turned to position
the engine is started. If the indicator remains
II and extinguishes after about 4
on, flashes on and off, or illuminates whilst
seconds. If the indicator illuminates at any
driving, stop the vehicle as soon as safety
other time, there is a fault with the system -
permits and SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE
seek qualified assistance urgently.
IMMEDIATELY. Seek qualified assistance
before driving. Always check the oil level when Adaptive Cruise Control active
this indicator illuminates. Illuminates when Adaptive Cruise
Check engine - AMBER Control detects a vehicle in front
and will react to it.
Illuminates as a bulb and system
check when the starter switch is Suspension- AMBER/RED
turned on and extinguishes as This lamp is shared between the
soon as the engine is started. Illumination at Air suspension system and
any other time indicates an engine fault. If the Dynamic Response.
indicator illuminates continuously while
The lamp illuminates both RED and AMBER
driving, the emission performance of the
briefly as a bulb check when the starter switch
engine management system is impaired - seek
is turned to position II.
qualified assistance.
If the indicator flashes while driving,
immediately reduce engine power to avoid
catalytic converter damage.

94
R

Warning Indicators
If illumination occurs whilst driving, a fault with SUSPENSION FAULT, VEHICLE LEAN, WHEN
one of the systems is indicated, as follows: CORNERING.
• If the lamp shows RED (a flashing red lamp If the following message is displayed in the
which changes to constant illumination message center:
after two minutes, and is accompanied by a SUSPENSION FAULT, NORMAL HEIGHT
warning chime): This indicates a system ONLY.
fault that may result in serious damage to
This indicates an air suspension fault, but the
vehicle components and reduced Dynamic
vehicle can still be driven normally.
Response performance. Stop the vehicle as
soon as safety permits and switch off the LOW gear- GREEN
engine. DO NOT CONTINUE DRIVING! Seek Illuminates when LOW range has
qualified assistance immediately. been selected; flashes during
The following message will be displayed in the range change.
message center window to accompany a red
Hill Descent Control (HDC) information -
warning lamp for a dynamic response system
GREEN
failure:
Illuminates briefly as a bulb and
SUSPENSION FAULT, STOP SAFELY, STOP
system check when the starter
ENGINE.
switch is turned to position II and
If the following message is displayed in the also illuminates when HDC is selected.
message center:
If HDC is selected and all operating conditions
SUSPENSION FAULT, MAX SPEED 50KPH are met, the indicator will illuminate
(MAX SPEED 30MPH) continuously.
This indicates an air suspension fault, with the If HDC is selected and all operating conditions
system not being able to control ride height. In are not met (vehicle in neutral gear and vehicle
which case the maximum speed indicated speed above HDC operating range) the
should not be exceeded until the fault has been indicator will flash.
rectified.
If a fault with the HDC system occurs, HDC will
• If the lamp shows AMBER (constant fade-out and then deselect, or deselect
illumination): This indicates a system fault immediately (depending on the type of fault and
that will result in reduced Dynamic whether or not HDC is in operation). The green
Response performance but will not leave indicator will extinguish and the message
the vehicle in a dangerous condition. You SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE will appear in the
may continue driving, but reduce speed, message center.
take additional care, and consult a Land
Rover Dealer at the earliest opportunity.
The ride quality of the vehicle may be
reduced in this condition.
The following message will be displayed in the
message center window to accompany an
amber warning lamp:

95
L

Warning Indicators
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) and FUEL/TEMPERATURE GAUGE
Electronic Traction Control (ETC) - AMBER DISPLAY
Illuminates briefly as a bulb check
when the starter switch is turned Headlamp high beam - BLUE
to position II. The indicator also Illuminates when the headlamps
illuminates when DSC is switched off. are switched to high beam or
Deactivating DSC has no effect on traction headlamps are flashed.
control.
Brake systems (U.S. only)
The indicator will flash while DSC and/or ETC is This indicator shares its position
activated and will remain flashing until the and symbol with four brake
system is no longer active. system warnings and illuminates
If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does briefly as a bulb check when the starter switch
not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed, is turned to position II (the indicator will
a fault has been detected in the system and DSC illuminate red and amber during bulb check).
and/or ETC will be inactive - drive with care and
seek qualified assistance as soon as possible. Brake systems (Canada only)
This indicator shares its position
and symbol with four brake
system warnings and illuminates
briefly as a bulb check when the starter switch
is turned to position II (the indicator will
illuminate red and amber during bulb check).
Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) - AMBER
If the indicator remains amber after starting, or
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the EBA
system is indicated. Drive with care and seek
qualified assistance urgently.
Brake pad wear - AMBER
It illuminates when brake pad wear has reached
a predetermined limit. Drive with care and seek
qualified assistance urgently.
Electronic Brake force Distribution (EBD) -
RED
A fault with the EBD system is indicated by
illumination of the red brake warning indicator.
If this illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, stop the vehicle gently, as soon as
safety permits, check and top up brake fluid if
necessary. If the lamp remains illuminated,
seek qualified assistance before continuing.

96
R

Warning Indicators
Brake fluid level - RED SPEEDOMETER
Low brake fluid level is indicated by illumination
Cruise control active - AMBER
of the red brake warning indicator. If this
illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, Illuminates when cruise control is
stop the vehicle gently, as soon as safety operating.
permits. Check and top up brake fluid if Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) -
necessary. If the lamp remains illuminated, AMBER
seek qualified assistance before continuing.
Illuminates when a fault occurs
Have the problem checked by your Land Rover
with the Adaptive Front lighting
Dealer.
System. Seek qualified assistance
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) - AMBER urgently.
Illuminates as a bulb check when Parkbrake system - RED or AMBER (U.S. only)
the starter switch is turned to
Illuminates for about 3 seconds as
position II. If the indicator remains
a bulb check when the starter
on or illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the
switch is turned to position ll.
ABS system is indicated. Drive with care,
avoiding heavy brake application, and seek If an indicator flashes red or illuminates yellow,
qualified assistance urgently. a fault with the parkbrake system is indicated,
seek qualified assistance before continuing.
When parking the vehicle in this condition,
ensure that the vehicle is secured stationary
without reliance on the parkbrake.
Parkbrake system - RED or AMBER
(Canada only)
Illuminates for about 3 seconds as
a bulb check when the starter
switch is turned to position ll.
If an indicator flashes red or illuminates yellow,
a fault with the parkbrake system is indicated,
seek qualified assistance before continuing.
When parking the vehicle in this condition,
ensure that the vehicle is secured stationary
without reliance on the parkbrake.
Front fog lamps - GREEN
Illuminates when the front fog
lamps are switched on.
Rear fog lamps - AMBER
Illuminates when the rear fog
lamps are switched on.

97
L

Audible Warnings
Audible Warnings

AUDIBLE WARNINGS Adaptive Cruise Control


The market specification will determine which A warning chime will sound:
of the following audible warnings are • When the driver must intervene and take
appropriate to your vehicle. control.
Electronic air suspension warnings Electric parkbrake
A warning chime will sound: A warning chime will sound:
• Whenever the speed threshold for the • If the driver selects electric parkbrake
current ride height is reached. whilst the vehicle is moving.
• Whenever the air suspension is lowered to Starter key reminder
crawl mode.
A warning will chime continuously:
Dynamic Response warning • If the key is left in the starter switch while
A warning chime will sound: the driver's door is open. The chime stops
• If a fault with the Dynamic Response as soon as the door is closed or the key is
system is detected. The chime will coincide removed from the starter switch.
with the suspension warning lamp flashing Seat belt reminder
RED then illuminating continuously after 2
In some markets, a warning chime will sound
minutes, with the following message in the
(one second frequency):
message center; SUSPENSION FAULT,
STOP SAFELY, STOP ENGINE. This • If the driver's seat belt has not been
indicates a system fault that may result in fastened when the starter switch is turned
serious damage to vehicle components and on. The chime operates in conjunction with
reduced Dynamic Response performance. the seat belt warning indicator and sounds
Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits for 6 seconds, or until the seat belt is
and switch off the engine. DO NOT fastened (whichever occurs first).
CONTINUE DRIVING! Seek qualified If the seat belt remains unfastened, the chime
assistance immediately. will sound at intervals of 15 seconds.
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) warning
A warning chime will sound once:
• If a fault with the DSC system is detected,
and the appropriate warning indicator(s)
illuminates (DSC, ABS, Amber Brake
Warning or HDC fault or text message). The
vehicle may still be driven with care, but
seek qualified assistance at the earliest
opportunity.

98
R

Lamps and Indicators


Lamps and Indicators

EXTERIOR LAMPS
Lamps master switch

AUTO

AUTO

5 6 7
H6075G

The detent positions are:


2 3 5. Off
1
4 6. Front fog lamps
7. Front and Rear fog lamps
AUTO
Side lamps
The front and rear side lamps, along with
license plate and marker lamps, illuminate
when the lamps master switch is turned to
positions 2 or 3, regardless of the position of
the starter switch.
H6073L Automatic control lamps
The rotary master switch has a maximum of With the rotary master switch in position 4 and
four positions and three detent positions. If a starter switch in position II, the side lamps, low
vehicle is not fitted with all options, the number beam headlamps and license plate lamps will
of switch positions will be reduced accordingly. illuminate automatically when the ambient light
The positions are: falls below a pre-defined level.
1. Off All of the lamps will go out when the ambient
light rises above that level.
2. Side lamps
3. Low beam headlamps
4. Automatic control lamps

99
L

Lamps and Indicators


High beam Dimmer control
Rotate the dimmer control to vary the level of
instrument pack illumination.

AUTO

H6076G

With the rotary master lighting switch in


position 3 and starter switch in position ll, push
the column lighting switch lever away from the
steering wheel as far as it will go to select high
beam, and release it.
To cancel high beam, pull the lever towards the AUTO

steering wheel and release it.


While high beam is selected, a blue indicator
will be illuminated in the instrument pack.
Headlamp high beam flash
To flash the headlamps on high beam, pull the
lever towards the steering wheel and release it. H6079L

The blue indicator in the instrument pack


illuminates when the headlamps are flashed.

100
R

Lamps and Indicators


Headlamp courtesy delay Stop lamps
As a driver convenience feature the headlamps The stop lamps will illuminate when the brake
and reverse lamps will illuminate for a short pedal is pressed and will remain on while the
time after the vehicle is parked. Turn the starter brake pedal is pressed.
switch off with the headlamps still switched on. The stop lamps also illuminate when Hill
The lamps master switch can be in positions 2, Descent Control is braking the vehicle or during
or 3. Electronic Parkbrake dynamic deceleration.
Remove the key from the starter switch and
Reverse lamps
turn lamps master switch fully
counter-clockwise to the Off position. The Selection of reverse gear will operate the
headlamps and reverse lamps will remain reverse lamps.
illuminated for up to 240 seconds. This Front fog lamps
automatic time delay is configurable (see
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 77). WARNING
The courtesy delay may be cancelled at any Fog lamps should ONLY be used when
time by turning the starter switch to position l visibility is severely restricted - as soon as
or II or the lamps master switch from position conditions clear, switch off fog lamps to
1 to 2. prevent dazzling of other road users.
Note: If Automatic Control Lamps are switched
With the lamps master switch in positions 2 or
on, the headlamp courtesy delay will operate
3, pull out the switch to its first-out detent
automatically.
position 6 to operate the front fog lamps.
Headlamp courtesy delay can be
An indicator will illuminate in the instrument
enabled or disabled by a Land Rover
pack.
Dealer or by the driver. See SELECTING
SETTINGS OPTION, 77. Rear fog lamps
Daytime running lamps With the lamps master switch in positions 2 or
3, pull out the switch to its fully extended detent
With the engine running and the main lighting
position 7.
switch turned off, the front and rear side lamps,
the license plate lamps and the low beam An indicator will illuminate in the instrument
headlamps will illuminate. The instrument pack pack.
illumination remains off.
Unless they are required or prohibited
by law, daytime running lamps can be
disabled/enabled by a Land Rover
Dealer.
Note: The following lamps operate only with
the starter switch in position ll.

101
L

Lamps and Indicators


HAZARD WARNING LAMPS DIRECTION/TURN INDICATORS

1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

H6082G

With the starter switch in position II, the


H6081G left-hand steering column lever will operate the
Press the switch to operate the hazard warning direction/turn indicators (a GREEN warning
lamps. All of the direction/turn indicator lamps indicator on the instrument pack will flash in
(including the instrument pack warning time with the direction/turn indicators).
indicators and those fitted to a trailer) will flash Hold the lever partially up or down against
together. spring pressure to indicate a lane change.
Use ONLY in an emergency to warn other road Bulb failure of any front or rear direction/turn
users when your stationary vehicle is causing indicator lamp (not side repeaters) will cause
an obstruction, or is in a hazardous situation. the instrument pack warning indicator to flash
Remember to switch off before moving away. rapidly.

102
R

Wipers and Washers


Wipers and Washers

OPERATING WINDSHIELD WIPERS


The wipers and washers will only operate when
the starter switch is turned to position I or II. 3
Note:
• DO NOT operate the wipers on a dry 2
windshield.
1
• In freezing or very hot conditions, ensure
that the wiper blades are not stuck to the 0
glass.
• In winter, remove any snow or ice from 4
around the wiper arms and blades,
including the wiped area of the windshield
H6083G
and the heater air intakes.
Note: If the wiper blades have stuck to the Rain sensor variable delay
glass, an electronic cut-out may temporarily Push the lever up to position 1.
prevent the wiper motor from operating. If this
is the case, switch the wipers off and turn the Normal speed wipe
starter switch off. Clear the obstruction and try Push the lever up to position 2.
again.
Fast speed wipe
Push the lever up to position 3.
Single wipe
Pull the lever down to position 4 and release
immediately.
Note: With the lever held down, the wipers will
operate at fast speed until the lever is released.

103
L

Wipers and Washers


Rain sensor variable delay Auto park
Caution: BEFORE entering an automatic car If the starter switch is turned to the Off position
wash, ensure that the wipers are switched off- while the wipers are operating, they will
otherwise, they could operate during the car continue to the Park position and stop.
wash programme and be damaged. Speed-dependent mode
Semi-automatic operation of the wiper blades is When speed dependent mode is configured, the
possible by setting the wiper lever to the rain operation of all wiper modes will be affected by
sensor variable delay mode. In this mode, the vehicle speed.
wipers operate only when the rain sensor If the vehicle’s speed drops below 8km/h
detects moisture on windshield and remain (5 mph) with the wipers operating, the wiper
inactive whilst the screen is dry. frequency automatically reduces. The wipers
will switch to the next lowest operating speed.
When the vehicle’s speed increases to over
8 km/h (5 mph), the original wiper speed
setting is restored automatically.
This setting can be configured by a Land
Rover Dealer.

H6085G

The rain sensor is fitted to the inside of the


windshield, immediately ahead of the rear view
mirror. The sensor is able to detect varying
amounts of dirt or water on the outside of the
windshield.
With the wiper switch in position 1, the variable
delay automatically adjusts the frequency of the
wiper operation according to the information
supplied by the rain sensor.
You can increase (a wipe will occur
immediately) or decrease the sensitivity of the
rain sensor, and therefore the frequency of
wiper operation, by rotating the delay switch-
either clockwise or counter-clockwise.
If the sensor detects constant rain, the wipers
will operate continuously.

104
R

Wipers and Washers


WINDSHIELD WASHER HEADLAMP POWER WASH
If the headlamps are on, and there is sufficient
liquid in the washer reservoir, operating the
windshield washer will also power-wash the
headlamps.
The headlamp power wash will operate on
every fifth operation of the windshield washer,
provided that the headlamps are still switched
on and 10 minutes have elapsed since the last
headlamp wash.
H6086G Switching the headlamps off and back on again
will reset the cycle.
Push the wiper stalk button to operate the
windshield washer. If the button is pressed for When using the Terrain Response system, the
more than 0.5 seconds, the washer will headlamp wash will operate every third
continue to operate while the button is pressed. operation of the windshield washer in all
When the button is released, the wipers will Special Programs. See, Terrain Response,
complete the current stroke and then complete 193.
two further strokes before parking Note: If the fluid level sensor detects a low
automatically. level, the headlamp power wash is inhibited.
If the button is pressed for less than 0.5 Heated washer jets
seconds, only the washer will operate. If the ambient temperature falls to a point where
WARNING icing of the washer jets could occur, power is
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures applied to heat the jets provided that the starter
below 40o F, use washer fluid with anti-freeze switch is in position II.
protection. In cold weather, failure to use An approved windshield wash is necessary to
washer fluid with anti-freeze protection could prevent freezing in very cold weather. See
result in impaired windshield vision and LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 293.
increase the risk of a vehicle crash.

Note: State or local regulations may restrict the


use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs),
which are commonly used as anti-freeze agents
in washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC
content should be used only if it provides
adequate freeze resistance for all regions and
climates in which the vehicle will be operated.

105
L

Wipers and Washers


REAR WINDOW WIPER Reverse gear input
AND WASHER If reverse gear is selected while the front wipers
are operating, the rear wiper will operate
accordingly
If reverse gear is selected while the rain sensor
is operational and the front windshield wipers
are in use, the rear wiper will operate
accordingly.
Tailgate open disable
If the rear wiper is switched on or already
1 running and the tailgate is opened, the wiper
will:
H6087G 2 • stop immediately
• not start to move if it is already stationary.
Wiper - intermittent operation
If the tailgate is subsequently closed, the wiper
Pull the lever to position 1. The intermittent will resume its normal operation after a delay of
delay period will vary according to the delay three seconds.
switch setting.
If the tailgate is open and the vehicle’s speed is
Wiper - continuous operation above 3 km/h (2 mph), the wiper will operate as
If preferred the rear wiper operation can be if the tailgate were closed.
configured by a Land Rover dealer to operate Auto park
continuously.
If the starter switch is turned to the Off position
This setting can be configured by a Land while the wiper is operating, it will continue to
Rover Dealer. the Park position and stop.
Washer
Pull the lever to position 2 and hold it. The wiper
and washer will both operate. When the lever is
released, the washer will stop and the wiper will
complete a further two wipe cycles and then
return to intermittent operation, provided that
the continuous function has not been set.

106
R

Horn
Horn

HORN

AUTO

H6088L

To operate, press either of the horn switches.

107
L

Electric Windows
Electric Windows

ELECTRIC WINDOWS WARNING


Closing of an electrically operated window on
2 fingers, hands or any vulnerable part of the
body, can result in serious injury. Always
4
observe the following precautions:
5
ISOLATE the rear window switches when
carrying children.
1 ENSURE that children are kept clear whilst
raising or lowering windows.
3
ENSURE that all adult passengers are familiar
with the controls and the potential dangers of
electrically operated windows.
DO NOT allow passengers to extend any part
of their bodies through a window aperture
while the vehicle is moving - injury from
flying debris, branches of trees or other
obstructions could occur.
It is recommended that the starter key be
removed when leaving the vehicle.

Operating the windows


H6090L
The electric windows can be operated when the
starter switch is at position I or II and for up to
Switch operation 40 seconds after the starter switch is turned to
1. Right-hand front window. position 0 (provided a front door is not
2. Left-hand front window. opened).
3. Right-hand rear window. If a front door is opened, the windows become
inoperable.
4. Left-hand rear window.
Press lightly and hold the top of a switch to
5. Isolating switch for rear window switches.
lower the window and lift lightly and hold the
top of a switch to raise the window. The window
will stop moving as soon as the switch is
released.

108
R

Electric Windows
One touch operation (driver’s door only) Anti-trap mechanism (driver’s door only)
By pressing firmly (and then releasing) the If the anti-trap sensor detects an obstruction
switch, a window will open or close fully at a during window closing, the closing operation is
single touch. interrupted and the window lowers slightly.
To stop window movement during a one-touch This is a safety feature designed to prevent
open or close operation, operate the switch in inadvertent closing of a window on vulnerable
the opposite direction to which the window is parts of the body or other obstructions.
travelling. Remove any obstruction and then close the
window.
Resetting One touch operation
If, for any reason, it is required to override the
Disconnecting the power when the window is
anti-trap mechanism the following procedure
moving will cause memory loss. To reset the
should be used:
memory, drive the window to the top and keep
the switch pressed for one second. After the initial attempt to close the window,
attempt it twice more with less than 10 seconds
Rear window isolation switch between switch presses.
On the next (fourth attempt) the window will
move up a short distance with increased force
to override the blockage.
If this fails to move the blockage the anti-trap
feature will be lost and must be reset. See
Resetting One touch operation, 109.

H6093L

Press the right-hand side of the switch to


isolate the window switches in the rear doors;
press the left-hand side to restore independent
control.

109
L

Electric Windows
Rear window operation

H6092G

The rear windows can also be operated from


the switches on the rear passenger doors. The
rear window switches will not operate if the
isolating switch in the driver’s door has been
activated. See Rear window isolation switch,
109.

110
R

Sunroof
Sunroof

SUNROOF OPERATION • To close the sunroof: With the sunroof


open, press the front of the switch. If the
starter key is not in position lI, the switch
will have to be held pressed. With the
sunroof in the tilt position, press and hold
the front of the switch.
Note: At any time while the sunroof is moving,
a further press of the switch will stop the
movement.
Caution: ALWAYS close the sunroof when the
vehicle is unattended.
Anti-trap mechanism
If the sunroof encounters resistance while
travelling anywhere between the fully open and
the closed position, the closing operation is
interrupted and the sunroof opens slightly. This
is a safety feature designed to prevent
inadvertent closing of the sunroof on vulnerable
parts of the body or other obstructions.
Remove any obstruction and then close the
sunroof.
This anti-trap feature does not apply while the
H6095L sunroof is closing from the tilted position.
The electric sunroof can be operated when the WARNING
starter switch is at positions l or II and for 40 It is possible to override the anti-trap
seconds after position 0 has been selected, mechanism by pressing and holding the front
provided that neither front door has been of the switch whilst the sunroof is closing.
opened. Extreme care must be taken to ensure that
• To tilt the sunroof: With the sunroof none of the vehicles occupants have any part
closed, press the front of the switch. The of their body in a position where it can be
sunroof will move towards its fully tilted trapped by the sunroof.
position. The override allows the sunroof to be closed
• To open the sunroof: With the sunroof in when movement is restricted by ice or dirt.
the closed position, press the rear of the
switch momentarily. If the starter key is not
in position II, the switch will have to be held
pressed.

111
L

Sunroof
WARNING Sunroof blind
Accidental closure of a sunroof on fingers,
hands or any vulnerable part of the body, can
result in serious personal injury. Always
observe the following precautions:
ENSURE that children are kept clear and that
the sunroof is not obstructed when opening or
closing.
ENSURE that all adult passengers are familiar
with the controls and the potential dangers of
operating an electrically operated sunroof.
DO NOT allow passengers to extend any part
of their bodies through the sunroof aperture H6097L

while the vehicle is moving - injury from Pull the sunroof blind, across the sunroof
flying debris, branches of trees or other aperture to open and close.
obstructions could occur.
Note: The sunroof blind can be opened and
closed manually, but will retract automatically
Operation after power supply interruption when the sunroof is opened.
Under certain unusual circumstances, the
sunroof may lose its calibration which will
render it inoperable. If this happens, it needs to
be recalibrated as follows:
• With the power supply reconnected, turn
the starter switch to position ll.
• Depress the front of the switch for 20
seconds. The sunroof will start to move.
Continue to hold the switch until the
sunroof completes one full open and
closing cycle. When the sunroof stops
moving, release the switch.
The sunroof can then be operated as normal.
Note: Calibration will not function if the vehicle
battery voltage is low.

112
R

Heating and Ventilation


TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
Heating and Ventilation

11 3 1 2 3 11

10
4 9
8

H6743N 5 6 7

The Air conditioning system features automatic In Auto mode, air conditioning, air distribution
temperature and air distribution control and is and blower speeds are adjusted automatically
programmed to maintain optimum levels of to achieve, and then maintain, a thermal
comfort within the vehicle in all but the most environment consistent with prevailing
severe climatic conditions. conditions.
The configuration of controls may vary The air distribution and blower controls can be
depending on the vehicle specification. The operated independently to override the
variants are shown as inset to the main automatic setting.
illustration. In this case, the appropriate indicator in the
The system may be fitted with the options of AUTO switch extinguishes. The circular
seat heating and windshield heating. indicator represents the blower, the rectangular
Note: The indicators in the switches illuminate indicator represents air distribution.
when that feature is operational. Press AUTO again to re-establish automatic
operation.
OPERATION OF CONTROLS
Note: If the air distribution and blower controls
1. Auto mode are operated independently, the system may
Allowing the system to function automatically is not be able to achieve or maintain the required
the simplest method of operation and is temperature settings.
preferable in most operating conditions. 2. Blower control
• Press AUTO (1) for fully automatic Rotate the blower control (2) to adjust airflow
operation. through the vents.
• Rotate the temperature controls (3) to
select the required temperature.
• Let the automatic temperature control
system do the rest.

113
L

Heating and Ventilation


3. Temperature controls 5. Air recirculation
Rotate the controls (3) to set the required Air recirculation prohibits the entry of air from
temperature for the corresponding side of the outside the vehicle, recirculating the air inside
passenger compartment. the vehicle instead. This is useful to prevent the
Temperatures within the range 16°C (60°F) to entry of traffic fumes.
28°C (83°F) can be set. The blue dot gives Air recirculation also significantly influences
maximum cooling and the red dot maximum the dehumidifying and cooling performance of
heating (depending on prevailing conditions). the air-conditioning system.
Note: Because of the mixing of air within the Note: Prolonged recirculation at low ambient
vehicle, the system will not achieve a temperatures may cause the windows to mist.
temperature differential from left to right of Press the button (5) once to
more than 4°C (39°F). activate air recirculation (switch
To obtain maximum air conditioning, rotate the indicator illuminates). Press the
temperature controls fully counter-clockwise. button a second time to deselect recirculation
This mode automatically activates the air and return to fresh air intake (switch indicator
conditioning and air recirculation, sets the extinguishes).
blower speed at maximum and the air With recirculation deselected, the ventilation
distribution to the face-level vents. system may automatically re-activate
Note: Rotating the temperature controls fully recirculation, if necessary, to enable optimum
clockwise provides maximum heating to the air-conditioning performance. When this
foot/windshield vents. occurs, the switch indicator will not illuminate.
When in stationary traffic, select P or N in an 6. Off
automatic transmission vehicle to maximise air Press to switch the system off; the
conditioning efficiency. indicator in the switch will
4. Air distribution control illuminate to show this condition.
Pressing the button again returns the system to
Press to select the desired distribution setting:
its previous mode.
Windshield and side window vents
7. Economy mode
With the engine running, press the
Face level vents button (7) to put the air
conditioning system into Economy
Foot level vents mode. This reduces the power consumed by
the system, and improves fuel economy.

More than one setting can be selected to


achieve the desired distribution.

114
R

Heating and Ventilation


8. Heated rear window 11. Front seat heaters
Press to operate. Press the left or right button once
Note: Heated rear window and to operate the relevant seat heater
windshield functions are only at a high level, press twice to heat
available while engine is running. the seat at a lower level. For further information
concerning the operation of both front and rear
WARNING seat heaters, please refer to SEAT HEATERS,
DO NOT stick labels over the heating 116.
elements on the rear window, and DO NOT
General notes
scrape or use abrasive materials to clean the
inside of the rear window. • For optimum operating efficiency, ensure
all the air vents (including those in the rear
of the vehicle) are open.
9. Heated windshield
Press to operate. • For the automatic temperature control
system to function efficiently, all windows
(and the sunroof) should be closed, and the
10. Defrost mode air intake vents free from ice, snow, leaves
or other debris.
If the windshield is misting or
covered in ice, press button (10) to • In very humid conditions, slight screen
activate the automatic defrost misting may be experienced when the air
programme; the system will immediately direct conditioning system is turned on. This is a
its output to achieve maximum windshield natural occurrence on automotive air
clearing by: conditioning systems. It is not a fault and
misting will clear after a few seconds once
• setting the blower speed to an appropriate
the air conditioning system is operating.
level.
• The air conditioning compressor will not
• distributing air flow to the windshield only.
function unless the engine is running.
• deactivating air recirculation (in certain
• Surplus water produced by the
circumstances).
dehumidifying process is expelled from the
In addition, the rear window and windshield system via drain tubes beneath the vehicle.
heaters will be switched on (or their timed This may result in a small pool of water
operating cycle will recommence if they are forming on the road when the vehicle is
already switched on). stationary and is not a cause for concern.
Press the button a second time (or select AUTO
or any air distribution control) to switch off the
Defrost mode. Heated window/windshield will
remain on until their time-out period has
expired.

115
L

Heating and Ventilation


SEAT HEATERS With the starter switch turned on, the seat
cushion and seat back can be heated at two
different levels.
• Press the switch once to operate at a high
level (both indicators illuminate).
After a period based on cabin temperature,
the high level will end and one lamp will
extinguish.
• Press twice to heat the seats at a lower level
(right-hand indicator extinguishes).
AUTO

1
4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

6
6CD-465
• Press the switch a third time to turn off the
heater manually (both indicators will
GHI JKL MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

extinguish).
The seat heaters are thermostatically controlled
and will operate to maintain a factory-set
H6103N
temperature. The indicators in the switches will
Front seat heaters remain illuminated until the heaters are
manually turned off, the high level has timed
out, or the engine is turned off.
Caution: The seat heaters consume
considerable power from the battery. For this
reason, they should ONLY be operated while
the engine is running.

H6104G

Rear seat heaters

116
R

Heating and Ventilation


VENTILATION

AUTO

1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

H6105L

The ventilation system provides fresh, Particulate air filter


conditioned and/or heated air to the interior of The ventilation system is fitted with a
the vehicle from the air intake grille in front of particulate air filter to remove most potentially
the windshield. harmful particles such as pollen, industrial
Note: Always keep the air intake grille clear of fall-out and road dust from the air entering the
obstructions such as leaves, snow or ice. vehicle's interior.
Air outlets are provided to the windshield, face, Combined filter
lap (driver only) and feet - the location of these Vehicles fitted with automatic temperature
vents is shown in the illustration above. The control have a combined carbon and particulate
temperature of the air supplied to the vents is air filter.
controlled by the heater.
The carbon layer reduces the level of odours
coming through the heater system from
outside.

117
L

Heating and Ventilation


Air vents Driver’s lap vent
Air temperature from all vents is controlled by
the temperature settings of the heater.
Face level vents

H6108L
H6107G
Airflow can be directed to the driver’s lap via a
Direct the air flow by moving the control in the vent located below the steering wheel. Control
center of the louvres. Rotate the thumbwheel the airflow by adjusting the louvres.
towards the right to fully open, or the left to fully
close the vents.
To ensure best ventilation and minimum noise,
the vents should be fully open when the air
distribution control is set to face level.

118
R

Heating and Ventilation


Center console rear vent controls

H6110G

Move the louvres to adjust the direction and


volume of airflow. Rotate the bezel to direct the
air flow.
Note: The temperature cannot be set by the rear
occupants.

119
L

Interior Lamps
Interior Lamps

LAMP TYPES Automatic activation


The vehicle’s interior lighting falls into two All of the courtesy lighting comes on when:
categories: • The position of the starter switch is
• Courtesy lighting consists of approach changed to 0, from I or II.
lamps, footwell lamps, puddle lamps, • Any door, including the tailgate is ajar.
starter switch glow ring and loadspace • The vehicle receives an unlock signal.
lamp. They enable safe entry into, or exit
from the vehicle in low light conditions The courtesy lamp feature automatically turns
without the need to switch on individual off these lamps if:
lamps. • 60 seconds (customer adjustable) have
• Demand lighting consists of interior lamps, elapsed since the courtesy lamps were
map lamps, glovebox and vanity mirror activated.
lamps. They offer lighting at the touch of a • 60 seconds (customer adjustable) have
switch, usually part of the lamp fitting. elapsed since the last door was closed.

Courtesy lighting • the starter switch is turned to II with all


doors closed.
Front footwell lamps
A battery-saving feature turns off all interior
These illuminate the front footwell areas of the
lamps 15 minutes after the starter switch has
vehicle.
been turned from II or I to 0. This timing feature
Starter switch glow ring will be restarted if any of the automatic
This surrounds and illuminates the starter switch-on criteria occur.
switch.
Collision illumination
Loadspace lamp In the event of a collision occurring at a speed
This illuminates the rear loadspace area during of less than 5 km/h (3 mph), all of the courtesy
entry to and exit from the vehicle, also when the lamps (except approach lamps) will be turned
tailgate is opened. on.

120
R

Interior Lamps
Front interior lamps Rear interior lamps

H6111G
H6112G
The front interior lamps are grouped together
centrally above the front windshield. Map lamp operation
Any of the interior lamps can be switched on or Press the required map lamp switch to turn on
off by pressing the switch adjacent to the lamp and off.
required.
Glovebox lamp
It is possible to de-activate the courtesy lamps
Illuminates automatically (with headlamps on)
automatic mode by pressing the center switch.
whenever the glovebox is opened and
The message INTERIOR LIGHTS OFF will flash
extinguishes when the glovebox is closed.
in the message center.
To switch the lamps off without disabling
automatic mode briefly press the center switch.
To enable automatic mode press the front
center switch for more than three seconds. The
message INTERIOR LIGHTS AUTOMATIC will
flash in the message center.

121
L

Interior Lamps
Vanity mirror lamps
The vanity mirror lamps are turned on when the
corresponding vanity mirror cover is opened
and turned off when it is closed.

H6113G

Note: Map lamps, glovebox lamps and vanity


mirror lamps will extinguish automatically after
15 minutes to prevent battery drain provided
that the starter switch is in position 0.
Low-level night-time illumination
When the main lighting switch is turned to
sidelamps or headlamps, LEDs in the front
interior lamps provides very low level
illumination. The level of illumination can be
adjusted using the instrument pack illumination
dimmer switch.
Low level lighting provides very limited
illumination for the interior of the vehicle, whilst
the vehicle is being driven, without affecting the
driver’s night vision.

122
R

Interior Equipment
Interior Equipment

CLOCK To adjust the time:


1. Switch on the radio and press the MENU
Setting the time - standard audio
button.
2. Rotate the rotary control clockwise until the
1
word Clock appears. Press the control.
3. Rotate the control to reveal Set and press
the control again.
4. After selecting Set the display shows the
hour setting. Rotate the control to change
the hour setting, or press it to accept it.
2
5. The display then shows the minute setting.
TA ON Rotate the control to change the minute
Clock setting, or press it to accept it.
The display then highlights OK. Press to
accept this.
3 Note: The clock will remain illuminated for ten
minutes after the starter key is turned to
Clock Cancel
position 0.
Set

4
Clock PM
Set 06 : 15 OK

5
Clock
Set AM 09 : 43 OK
H5531G

123
L

Interior Equipment
Setting the time - premium audio To adjust the time:
1. Switch on the radio and press the MENU
1 button.
2. Rotate the rotary control clockwise until the
word Clock appears. Press the control
again.
3. Rotate the control and then press it to
2 select the 12 or 24 hour scale or to set the
time.
News
Clock 4. After selecting Set the display shows the
1 2 3 4 5 6 hour setting. Rotate the control to change
the hour setting, or press it to accept it.
3
12 24 5. The display then shows the minute setting.
Rotate the control to change the minute
setting, or press it to accept it.
Time
12/24 12 Note: The clock will remain illuminated for ten
1 2 3 4 5 6 minutes after the starter key is turned to
position 0.
4
09
Time
Set AM 09
1 2 3 4 5 6

5
32
Time
Set AM 09 32
1 2 3 4 5 6

H6116G

124
R

Interior Equipment
SMOKERS’ EQUIPMENT Ashtrays
To remove the ashtray, open fully, then pull the
Lighter
ashtray upwards.

WARNING
DO NOT use the ashtrays for disposing of
waste paper or other combustible items.

H6117L

With the starter switch turned on, press the


lighter in to heat up. When it has reached the
correct temperature it will partially eject and
can then be withdrawn for use.
• ONLY hold the lighter by the handle.
After use, push the lighter back in to the first
position.

125
L

Interior Equipment
AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS Loadspace auxiliary power socket

Rear auxiliary power socket

H6122G

Another power socket is fitted in the left-hand


side trim in the loadspace.
H6121G
Using a power socket
A power socket is located on the rear face of the The power sockets can be used to power Land
center console. Rover approved accessories that use a
maximum of 180 watts.
Caution: NEVER plug non-approved
accessories into a power socket - damage to
the vehicle's electrical systems could occur.
Always run the engine during prolonged use
of electrical accessories, otherwise the
battery may become discharged.

126
R

Interior Equipment
CUP HOLDERS Rear seats cup holders
Front seats cup holders

H6367L

H6127G

The cup holders for the occupants of the rear


seats are in the center console. Pull out the tray
to gain access to the cup holders. Press in
again to close.
H6123L
The inner cores of the cup holders can be lifted
out for cleaning or to make a holder for a larger
drinks container.

127
L

Interior Equipment
WARNING Card holder
Do not carry open-top drink containers in the
cup holders while the vehicle is in motion; a
spilled hot drink could cause personal injury.
Spilled drinks can also damage upholstery,
carpeting and electrical components.
Use only for soft containers. DO NOT use to
hold cups made of glass, china or hard
plastic, as these may cause injury in the event
of an accident or emergency manoeuvre.
Unopened, sealed containers (drinks cans,
for example) are hard objects and may also
cause injury.

CUBBY BOX

H6133L

On the front inside face of the cubby box is a


feature to hold a credit/toll card.

H6131L

Lift the catch at the front of the cubby box lid to


access the main cubby box.

128
R

Interior Equipment
CD storage COOL BOX
When fitted, the cool box replaces the cubby
box.
The cool box is switched on/off using the
switch on the inside front lip of the cool box.
This switch has a built-in indicator which will
illuminate to show that the cool box is
operating. There is a short delay (1-2 seconds)
between pressing the switch, and illumination
of the indicator. During this period the control
system checks the battery voltage.
If the indicator does not illuminate when the
cool box is switched on, or it goes out while the
cool box is operating, this means that the
battery voltage is low and the cool box has
switched itself off. This will only happen when
the engine is not running.
If the engine is started, the indicator will
illuminate and the cool box will continue to
operate.
The cool box should be left switched off when it
is not needed to protect the vehicle’s battery.
H6132L

A rubber mat in the bottom of the cubby box is


designed to hold CD cases and is removable for
cleaning.

H6134G

129
L

Interior Equipment
The tray on top of the cool box should always SUN VISOR
be in place to ensure maximum cooling
performance. This tray can be inverted to allow
for the storage of taller bottles while still
maintaining the sealing.
The tray can be clipped onto the inside of the
main lid when not required.
The cool box is most effective when filled with
cold or pre-chilled items.
The cool box must be cleaned regularly to
remove any condensation or contamination H6136L
that could lead to odours.
Pivot the sun visor downward to reduce sun
Note: The cool box will continue to operate for glare through the windshield. If required, the
a short period after the starter switch is turned visor can then be pivoted towards the side
to position 0. window to reduce sun glare from that side of
the vehicle.
Vanity mirror
Lifting the cover of the vanity mirror switches
on the lamp; closing the cover switches off the
lamp.

H6135G

130
R

Interior Equipment
REAR-VIEW MIRROR GLOVEBOX
Auto-dim rear-view mirror

H6140L

The vehicle is equipped with an


electrochromatic dimming function that dims
the mirrors to reduce glare from the headlamps
of following vehicles at night. See
Auto-dimming, 143.
This function does not operate when reverse
gear has been selected.

H6147L

Lift the release catch to open the upper


glovebox. The lid will automatically be returned
by a spring to its closed position. It should be
pushed fully closed to latch it.

131
L

Interior Equipment

H6149L

Pull the release catch to open the lower


glovebox. Close the lid by pushing it until it
clicks.

132
R

Interior Equipment
CD storage CD storage removal

H6377L

If the optional cool box has been specified a CD


storage rack is available for the glovebox. H6379L

The rack can be removed by pressing down the


lock tab, and pulling the rack out of the
glovebox.

133
L

Interior Equipment
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS

H6151G

Four fixing points are provided in the rear


loadspace floor, to assist in safely securing
large items of luggage. Land Rover provide a
range of approved luggage retention
accessories.

WARNING
DO NOT carry unsecured equipment, tools or
luggage, which could move and cause
personal injury in the event of an accident or
emergency manoeuvre either on or off-road.

134
R

Loadspace Cover
Loadspace Cover

LOADSPACE COVER To operate the loadspace cover


1. Pull the rigid portion of the blind to unroll
the cover.
2. Engage the end pieces into the recessed
features moulded into the loadspace sides.
Caution: When retracting the cover ensure
that nothing is left on top. If any items are left
on top, including paper or fabrics, they may
be drawn into the mechanism and cause it to
jam.

H6153G

The loadspace cover is a cassette unit with a


roller-blind type of cover which can be
extended to cover the rear loadspace.

135
L

Loadspace Cover
To remove the loadspace cover WARNING
When fitting the loadspace cover position
ensure that the location pegs on the left hand
side are fully engaged and the release button
on the right hand side has returned fully to
ensure engagement. Failure to do so may
allow the cassette to move when the vehicle
is in motion.

H6155G

1. Disengage the ends from the recess and


fully retract the cover into the cassette unit.
2. Push the release button on the right-hand
side of the cassette housing and lift to
release the right-hand side of the cassette
from the loadspace trim.
3. Manoeuvre the complete loadspace cover
to the right-hand side to release the
left-hand side location pegs and extract
from the vehicle.
4. Installation of the loadspace cover is the
reverse of the removal procedure above.

136
R

In-Car Telephones
In-Car Telephones

IN-CAR TELEPHONES
For your safety, always note the following
precautions before fitting an in-car telephone,
or any mobile communication equipment.
• Only use an installation kit incorporating an
antenna external to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the installation is carried out by
a competent installer and that the installer
is aware of the Airbag SRS System.
For your safety

WARNING
Using any hand-held appliance while driving
can be dangerous. Always stop the vehicle
before making a call and ensure that the
telephone is switched off while you are
driving.

137
L

Voice Recognition
Voice Recognition

VOICE RECOGNITION Navigation and Telephone commands


Voice control provides a safe and convenient • Phone help - To list Telephone commands.
way of operating the audio system without the • Navigation help - To list Navigation
need to operate the controls manually. This commands.
enables you to concentrate fully on driving the
vehicle, and removes the need to divert your Please refer to the Navigation and
attention from the road ahead in order to Telephone Systems Handbook.
change settings, or receive feedback from the Activating the system
system.
A number of voice commands are available, and
with a little experience you will find them easy
and convenient to use. Whenever you issue one
of the defined commands with the system
active, the voice control system converts your
command into a control signal for the audio
system. Your inputs take the form of dialogues
or commands. You are guided through these
dialogues by announcements or questions.
Defined voice commands
The voice control system understands
predefined commands which need to be quoted
word for word.
An audio feedback of voice commands is
available. To activate the feedback, pull the AUTO

voice control paddle briefly and give one of the


following commands:
General commands
• Voice help - To list all commands.
H6159L
• Notepad help - To list Notepad commands.
To activate voice control:
Audio commands
• Briefly pull the control paddle (the Audio
• Radio help - To list Radio commands. will mute at this point). A brief acoustic
• CD help - To list CD commands. signal will be heard, and LISTENING will be
See Audio System, 299. displayed on the main message center to
indicate that the system is now waiting for
a voice command.
Note: It is only necessary to use the steering
wheel voice control paddle at the beginning of
each voice session.

138
R

Voice Recognition
Using Notepad
Notepad is a feature for recording short
messages as memory aids or reminders.
You can record up to 10 notes for up to 30
seconds each.
Pull the voice paddle towards the steering
wheel, wait for LISTENING to appear in the
message center, then give the Notepad
command.
The voice recording will automatically be
stopped if the note is longer than 30 seconds.
To stop voice recording at any time, pull the
voice button towards the steering wheel.

Command System response Action


Record note or Notepad The system gives a beep to You may start your recording
record. indicate the start of recording. after the beep. To stop
recording, pull and hold in the
steering wheel voice paddle.
Play Notepad or Read Notepad audio will read out Saying Replay will replay the
Notepad. each note in turn. You can say previous message.
Replay, Delete or Cancel after Saying Delete will delete the
each beep, or remain silent to previous message.
hear the next note. Saying Cancel will end the
Notepad session.
Clear Notepad or Notepad Do you want to clear the Say YES to delete all stored
delete. Notepad? notes. Say NO to cancel the
command.
Notepad help. The system will read out
Notepad information and all
the commonly used
commands.

139
L

Land Rover Homelink®


Land Rover Homelink®

HOMELINK® TRANSMITTER
The Land Rover HomeLink® Universal
Transmitter is built into the underside of the
rear view mirror and provides a convenient way
to replace up to three hand-held transmitters
with a single built-in device. This innovative
feature will learn the radio frequency codes of
most current transmitters to operate garage
doors and gates. With the available accessory
package, the HomeLink® Transmitter can also
control home or office lighting and security
systems. For reliability, the HomeLink®
Transmitter is powered by your vehicle’s
battery and charging system.
Precautions
When programming your HomeLink®
Transmitter, you will be operating the garage
door or gate. Be sure that people and objects
are out of the way, to prevent potential harm or
damage. 1 2 3 4 5 6
H6144N
WARNING
Do not use this HomeLink®
Transmitter with 1. Channel 1 button
any garage door that lacks safety stop and
2. Channel 2 button
reverse features, as required by federal
safety standard (this includes any garage or 3. Status indicator lamp
door opener model manufactured before Red - transmitter
April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which Green - auto dimming
cannot detect an object in the path of a closing
door and then automatically stop and reverse 4. Channel 3 button
the door, does not meet current federal safety 5. Dimming on button
standards. Using a garage door opener 6. Dimming off button
without these features increases the risk of
serious injury or death. For more information
on this matter, call toll-free: 1-800-355-3515
or consult www.homelink.com.

140
R

Land Rover Homelink®


Programming If after repeated attempts you do not
1. Turn the starter switch to position ll. successfully program the HomeLink®
Transmitter to learn the signal of the hand-held
2. If you have previously programmed your
transmitter, call toll-free for customer
HomeLink® Transmitter, proceed to step 3.
assistance: 1-800-355-3515 or consult
Otherwise, hold down buttons (1) and (4)
www.homelink.com.
on the HomeLink® Transmitter until the red
lamp (3) begins to flash (approximately 20 Operating the Land Rover HomeLink®
seconds). Release both buttons. Transmitter
This initializes the HomeLink® Transmitter Once it is programmed, the HomeLink®
and erases previous settings from all three Transmitter can be used in place of your
channels. hand-held transmitter(s). To operate, simply
DO NOT perform this step when press the appropriate button on the HomeLink®
programming additional hand-held Transmitter. The red lamp (3) comes on while
transmitters. the signal is being transmitted.
3. Decide which one of the three channels you Note: If your hand-held transmitter appears to
want to program. program the HomeLink® Transmitter, but does
not open your garage door and, if your garage
4. Hold the signal-emitting end of your door was manufactured after 1995, your garage
hand-held transmitter 5 - 14 cm (1 - 3 in.) door opener may have a code protected or
away from the HomeLink® Transmitter rolling code feature.
buttons so that you can still see the red
status indicator lamp (3). A rolling code type of system will change the
code of your garage door opener every time you
5. With one hand, push the hand-held open or close your garage door.
transmitter button, and with the other, the
desired button on the HomeLink® To determine if you have one of these systems,
Transmitter. Continue to press both depress the button on your HomeLink®
buttons through step 6. Transmitter that you programmed. If the red
lamp on the HomeLink® Transmitter flashes
6. Hold down both buttons until you see the rapidly for 1-2 seconds, then illuminates
red lamp on the Land Rover HomeLink® continuously, your garage door opener has a
Transmitter flash, first slowly and then rolling code system.
rapidly. (This could take up to a minute.) It
indicates that you have successfully
programmed the HomeLink® Transmitter
to learn the new frequency signal. Release
both buttons once the rapid flashing
begins.
7. Turn the starter switch to position 0.

141
L

Land Rover Homelink®


Training a garage door opener equipped with e) Your garage door opener should now
rolling codes recognize your HomeLink® Transmitter. If
To train your rolling code garage door opener to not, repeat the procedure but in step d)
operate from your HomeLink® Transmitter, press and release the transmitter button
follow these steps: three times. You may use either your
HomeLink® Transmitter or your original
1. Program your hand-held transmitter to the
hand-held transmitter to open your garage
HomeLink® Transmitter by following the
door.
procedures outlined previously (if you have
already completed this programming, If after following these suggestions you still
proceed to the next instruction). have difficulties programming your HomeLink®
Transmitter, call toll-free for customer
2. Train your garage door opener receiver to
assistance: 1-800-355-3515 or consult
recognize your HomeLink® Transmitter:
www.homelink.com.
(your garage door opener receiver will
learn to recognize the HomeLink® Erasing channels
Transmitter by following the same process To erase all three programmed channels, hold
used to train the hand-held transmitter) down the two outside buttons (1) and (4) until
a) Remove the cover panel from your the red lamp (3) begins to flash, then release
garage door opener receiver (the receiver both buttons. Individual channels cannot be
should be located by the garage door erased, but can be reprogrammed using the
motor). procedures for programming the HomeLink®
b) Locate the training button on the garage Transmitter (steps 3 through 6).
door opener receiver. The exact location
and color of the button may vary by garage
door opener brand. If you have difficulty
locating the training button, reference your
garage door opener manual, call
1-800-355-3515 or consult
www.homelink.com.
c) Press the training button on the garage
door opener receiver for 1-2 seconds, then
perform the next step within 30 seconds.
d) Return to the HomeLink® Transmitter in
the vehicle and depress the programmed
button twice. Depress the button to
confirm that the HomeLink® Transmitter
has been trained to the receiver.

142
R

Land Rover Homelink®


Reprogramming a single button Accessories
To program a device to the HomeLink® Accessories for your HomeLink® Transmitter
Transmitter using a previously trained button: are available from the manufacturer of the
1. Press and hold the desired button. No NOT device. If you would like additional information
release the button until step 4 has been or would like to purchase other accessories
completed. such as home lighting or security products that
can be operated by the HomeLink®
2. When the indicator lamp begins to flash
Transmitter, please call the toll-free:
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
1-800-355-3515 or consult
hand-held transmitter 5 - 14 cm (1 - 3 in.)
www.homelink.com.
away from the HomeLink® Transmitter
surface. Auto-dimming
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter The auto-dimming feature of the interior mirror,
button. The HomeLink® indicator lamp will can be turned on or off using buttons (5) and
flash, at first slowly and then rapidly. (6). See Auto-dim rear-view mirror, 131.
4. When the indicator lamp begins to flash Compliance
rapidly, release both buttons. IC: 4112A-NZLBTPHL
Note: Be sure to retain your original transmitter This device complies with Part 15 FCC Rules.
for future programming procedures (i.e. new Operation is subject to the following two
vehicle purchase). conditions: (1) this device may not cause
When selling your vehicle, be sure to erase all harmful interference, and (2) this device must
channels on the HomeLink® Transmitter that accept any interference received, including
you programmed. interference that may cause undesired
operation.
HomeLink®is a registered trademark owned by
Johnson Controls, Inc. Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

143
L

Starting and Driving


Driving and Operating

STEERING COLUMN LOCK Caution: The gear selector MUST be in the P


(park) position, before the starter key can be
removed. If the starter key is left in place, a
continuous battery drain occurs which could
completely discharge the battery.

WARNING
AUTO

To prevent the loss of steering control, do not


under any circumstances turn the key to the O
position while the vehicle is moving. To
prevent the steering column lock engaging, it
is most important that before the vehicle is
moved in any way, the key be inserted in the
lock and turned to position I. If, due to an
accident or electrical fault, it is not safe to
turn the key, disconnect the negative lead of
the battery and then turn the key.

H6161L

The starter switch and steering column lock are


located in the side of the steering column cover.
To unlock the steering column
Insert the key into the starter switch and rotate
key to position l. If the key will not rotate, turn
the steering wheel left or right while rotating the
key.
To lock the steering column
Remove the key from the starter switch.
The lock is now set to operate. Rotate the
steering wheel until the lock engages.

144
R

Starting and Driving


STARTER SWITCH In particular, you should be aware that if the
The starter switch uses the following sequence engine fails to start, continued use of the starter
of key positions to operate the steering lock, may result in unburnt fuel damaging the
electrical circuits and starter motor: catalytic converter.
1. Check that the parkbrake is applied and that
Position 0 the transmission selector is in the P (Park)
• Steering locked. or N (Neutral) position.
• Some lighting circuits are operational, 2. Switch off all unnecessary electrical
including: sidelamps and hazard warning equipment.
lamps. 3. Turn the starter switch to position II and
• With the driver’s door open, seat memory then on to position III and immediately
facility operational. release it. The starter will automatically
switch off when the engine starts. DO NOT
Position I
press the accelerator pedal while starting.
• Steering unlocked.
Note: The battery charging and oil pressure
• Clock, audio system and cigar lighter can warning lamps should extinguish as soon as
now be operated. the engine is running.
• Wipers/washers are operational.
Cold climates
Position II In very cold climates the oil pressure warning
• All instruments, warning indicators and lamp may take several seconds to extinguish.
electrical circuits are operational. Similarly, engine cranking times will also
increase. At -25°C (-13°F) the starter motor
Position III may require continuous operation for as long
• The starting sequence is initiated. Note that as 30 seconds before the engine will start. For
operation of position I electrical functions this reason, ensure that all non-essential
will be interrupted during engine cranking. electrical equipment is switched off to
Note: The gear selector position P or N must be maximise the available battery effort for
selected before the engine can be started. starting.

STARTING After starting


Ensure that the parkbrake AND FOOT BRAKE
WARNING are firmly applied and the accelerator pedal is
Never start or leave the engine running in an not depressed while moving the gear selector
unventilated building - exhaust gases are lever from N or P. An interlock will prevent this
poisonous and contain carbon monoxide, movement if the foot brake is not applied.
which can cause unconsciousness and may
even be fatal.

Before starting the engine and driving, ENSURE


that you are familiar with the precautions
shown under CATALYTIC CONVERTER, 151.

145
L

Starting and Driving


GENERAL DRIVING ADVICE Vehicle height
Caution: The overall height of your vehicle
Instruments and warning indicators exceeds that of ordinary passenger cars. See,
Before driving it is important to fully DIMENSIONS, 298. Always be aware of the
understand the function of the instruments and height of your vehicle and check the available
warning indicators (see INSTRUMENT PACK, headroom before driving through low
74). entrances. This is particularly important if the
Caution: Red warning indicators are of vehicle is fitted with a roof rack or if a sunroof
particular importance, their illumination is open.
indicating that a fault exists. If a red light Vehicle stability
illuminates, always stop the vehicle and seek
qualified assistance before continuing. WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
In the case of the parkbrake, the above only
roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.
applies if the vehicle is moving when the
Since these vehicles are designed to be
indicator illuminates.
operated off-road, these vehicles have a
Power assisted steering higher ground clearance and hence a higher
Note: Power assistance is dependent on the center of gravity. Such a feature has been
engine running. If the engine is not running, a associated with an increased risk of vehicle
much greater effort will be required to steer the roll-over. An advantage associated with
vehicle. higher ground clearance vehicles is a better
view of the road, allowing the driver to
Warming up anticipate problems. Another factor shown to
In the interests of fuel economy and of reducing significantly increase roll-over risk is
engine wear, it is advisable to drive the vehicle unauthorized vehicle modifications such as
straight away, remembering that harsh fitting incorrect specification tires (See
acceleration or labouring the engine before the WHEELS AND TIRES, 296), oversize tires,
normal operating temperature has been body lifting, incorrect springs/dampers,
reached can damage the engine. incorrect vehicle loading/trailer towing.
When the engine is cold, engine idle speeds will However, on-road crash data also indicates
be faster than normal. Under these that driver behaviour is a greater factor than a
circumstances, use the foot brake to control the high center of gravity in determining a
vehicle while idling until the engine is warm and vehicle's overall roll-over rate. The single
running at normal speed, and be aware of the most effective driver behaviour that can
need to take additional care when reduce the risk of injury or death in all crashes
manoeuvering the vehicle. including roll-over, is to ALWAYS WEAR
YOUR SEAT BELT and to properly restrain all
child passengers in the rear seat in an
appropriate child safety seat. In a roll-over
crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a
seat belt.

146
R

Starting and Driving


Other measures that can reduce the risk of WARNING
injury and death from vehicle crashes and
Many vehicle roll-overs occur when a driver
roll-over are:
attempts to bring a vehicle back onto the road
• Limit speed. Posted speed limits should after some or all of the wheels drift onto the
never be exceeded, and you should always shoulder of the road, especially when the
drive below these limits whenever traffic, shoulder is unpaved. If you find yourself in
weather, road or other conditions dictate. such a situation, do not initiate any sharp or
Always use your common sense and good abrupt steering and/or braking manoeuvers to
judgement. re-enter the roadway. Instead, let the vehicle
• Take curves at reasonable speeds, avoiding slow down as much as safely possible before
unnecessary braking. attempting to re-enter the roadway and keep
• Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, road your wheels as straight as possible while
and weather conditions. Avoid risk-taking re-entering the roadway.
behaviour such as following too close,
rapid lane changing or abrupt manoeuvers. Breakdown safety
• Assume that pedestrians and other drivers If a breakdown occurs while travelling:
are going to make mistakes. Anticipate • Wherever possible, consistent with road
what they might do. Be ready for their safety and traffic conditions, the vehicle
mistakes. should be moved off the main highway,
• Avoid distractions such as cellular phone preferably onto the shoulder as far as
calling, reading, eating, drinking or possible.
reaching for items on the floor. • Switch on hazard warning lamps.
• Before changing lanes, check your mirrors • If possible, position a warning triangle or a
and use the direction/turn indicators. flashing amber light at an appropriate
• Always leave room for unexpected events distance from the vehicle to warn other
such as sudden braking. traffic of the breakdown, (note the legal
requirements of some countries).
• Never operate your vehicle when you have
consumed alcohol, are sleepy or fatigued • Consider evacuating passengers through
or have taken any medication that affects the doors facing away from traffic, to a safe
judgement, reflexes or alertness. area away from the vehicle, as a precaution
in case your vehicle is accidentally struck
by another one.

147
L

Starting and Driving


Fuel economy Breaking-in
Fuel consumption is influenced by two major Proper breaking-in will have a direct bearing on
factors: the reliability and smooth running of the vehicle
• How your vehicle is maintained. throughout its life.
• How you drive your vehicle. In particular, the engine, gearbox, brake pads
and tires need time to bed-in and adjust to the
To obtain optimum fuel economy, it is essential
demands of everyday motoring. During the first
that the vehicle is maintained in accordance
800 km (500 miles), it is essential to drive with
with the manufacturer's service schedule.
consideration for the breaking-in process, and
Items such as the condition of the air cleaner to avoid situations where heavy braking is
element, tire pressures and wheel alignment required, heed the following advice:
will have a significant effect on fuel
• LIMIT maximum road speed to 110 km/h
consumption. But, above all, the way in which
(70 mph) or 3,000 rev/min. Initially, drive
you drive is most important. The following hints
the vehicle on a light throttle and only
may help you to obtain better value from your
increase engine speeds gradually once the
motoring:
breaking-in distance has been completed.
• Avoid unnecessary, short, start-stop
• DO NOT operate at full throttle or allow the
journeys.
engine to labour in any gear.
• Avoid fast starts by accelerating gently and
• AVOID fast acceleration and heavy braking
smoothly from rest.
except in emergencies.
• Do not drive in the lower gears for longer
than necessary. Remember! Regular servicing is vital to ensure
that the brake pads are examined for wear and
• Decelerate gently and avoid sudden and
changed periodically to ensure long term safety
heavy braking.
and optimum performance.
• Anticipate obstructions and adjust your
speed accordingly well in advance.
• When stationary in traffic, select neutral to
improve fuel economy and air conditioning
performance.
• Turn off air conditioning when not
required.

148
R

Starting and Driving


Servicing requirements BEFORE DRIVING OFF-ROAD
Vehicles which operate in arduous conditions, Before driving off-road, it is absolutely essential
particularly on dusty, muddy or wet terrain, and that drivers become familiar with the vehicle’s
vehicles which, undergo frequent or deep controls, in particular the transfer gear switch,
wading conditions will require more frequent CommandShift, Hill Descent Control (HDC) and
servicing. Contact a Land Rover Dealer for the Terrain Response system.
advice.
Basic information and Off-Road driving
After wading in salt water, or driving on sandy techniques can be found in the Off-Road driving
beaches, use a hose to wash the underbody handbook, available on-line at:
components and exposed body panels with http://www.ownerinfo.landrover.com
fresh water. This will help to protect the It is strongly recommended that off-road driver
vehicle's cosmetic appearance and prevent training is undertaken by anyone intending to
impairment of parkbrake efficiency. drive off-road. Training is available at your
Wading nearest Land Rover Experience centre. More
details can be found at:
Caution: The maximum advisable wading http://www.landroverexperience.com
depth is normally 540 mm (21 in.). Wading at
a depth greater than the maximum advisable AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
wading depth is not recommended. Caution: DO NOT use auxiliary equipment
If the vehicle remains stationary for any such as roller generators that are driven by
length of time, in water above the level of the only one or two wheels of the vehicle, as they
door sills, severe electrical damage may will cause failure of the transfer gearbox.
occur. Some local jurisdictions require emission
Do not switch off the engine during wading. If testing using two-wheel roller dynamometer.
the engine stalls during wading, re-start Your vehicle is equipped with permanent
immediately. Should the engine stall, get it 4-wheel drive and cannot be safely operated on
checked by a Land Rover Dealer as soon as these machines. For more information
possible. regarding safe emission testing of your vehicle,
If during wading, water enters the engine air consult your Land Rover Dealer.
intake, switch off immediately. The vehicle
should be towed from the water and
recovered to a Land Rover Dealer.

149
L

Starting and Driving


EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING
Exhaust fumes contain poisonous substances
and inhalation can cause unconsciousness
and may even be fatal.
• DO NOT inhale exhaust gases
• DO NOT START or leave the engine
running in an enclosed, unventilated
area, or drive with the tailgate/tailglass
open.
• DO NOT modify the exhaust system from
the original design.
• ALWAYS have exhaust system leaks
repaired immediately.
• If you think exhaust fumes are entering
the vehicle, have the cause determined
and corrected immediately.

Land Rover vehicles are fitted with emission


and evaporative control equipment necessary
to meet a number of territorial requirements.
In many countries it is against the law for
vehicle owners to modify or tamper with
emission control equipment, or to sanction the
unauthorised replacement or modification of
this equipment. In such cases the vehicle owner
and the repairer may both be liable for legal
penalties.
It is important to remember that all Land Rover
Dealers are properly equipped to perform
repairs and to maintain the emission control
system on the vehicle.

150
R

Catalytic Converter
Catalytic Converter

CATALYTIC CONVERTER • Consult your Land Rover Dealer if your


The exhaust system incorporates a catalytic vehicle is burning excessive oil (blue
converter, which converts most harmful smoke from the exhaust), as this will
exhaust emissions from the engine into progressively reduce catalyst efficiency.
environmentally less harmful gases. • On rough terrain do not allow the underside
It can not, however, remove all harmful exhaust of the vehicle to be subjected to heavy
emissions. impacts which could damage the catalytic
converter.
Caution: Catalytic converters can be easily
damaged through improper use, particularly • DO NOT overload or excessively rev the
if the wrong fuel is used, or if an engine engine.
misfire occurs. For this reason it is VERY • DO NOT switch off the engine when the
IMPORTANT that you heed the precautions vehicle is in motion with a drive gear
which follow. selected.

Fuel WARNING
ONLY use fuel recommended for the vehicle. Exhaust system temperatures can be
extremely high - DO NOT park on ground
Starting the engine where combustible materials such as dry
• DO NOT continue to operate the starter grass or leaves could come into contact with
after a few failed attempts (unburnt fuel the exhaust system - in dry weather a fire
may be drawn into the exhaust system, could result.
thereby poisoning the catalyst), seek
qualified assistance and do not attempt to Vehicle maintenance
clear a misfire by pressing the accelerator
pedal. • It is vital that unqualified persons do not
tamper with the engine, and that regular
• When starting the engine, DO NOT drive if systematic maintenance is carried out by a
a misfire is suspected and do not attempt Land Rover Dealer.
to clear a misfire by pressing the
accelerator - seek qualified assistance.
• Do not attempt to push or tow-start the
vehicle.
Driving
• If a misfire is suspected, the Check Engine
warning indicator is flashing or the vehicle
lacks power while driving, avoid high
speeds and seek immediate assistance
from your Land Rover Dealer.
• NEVER allow the vehicle to run out of fuel
(the resultant misfire could damage the
catalyst).

151
L

Fuel and Refuelling


Fuel and Refuelling

GAS STATION SAFETY FUEL FILLER


WARNING WARNING
Petroleum gases are highly inflammable and, To avoid any sudden discharge of fuel caused
in confined spaces, are also extremely by excessive fuel vapor pressure, DO NOT
explosive. fully remove the filler cap until any captive
tank pressure has been released.
Always take sensible precautions when Take careful note of warning labels located
refuelling: around the filler cap.
• Switch off the engine.
• Do not smoke or introduce other ignition The fuel filler is located behind the rear
sources. right-hand side wheel arch. An arrow on the fuel
gauge points to that side of the vehicle.
• Switch off mobile phones.
• Take care not to spill fuel.
• Do not overfill the tank.
• Do not fill gas cans in the vehicle.
• Do not leave the fuel filler pump unattended
during refuelling.
• Use only the hold-open latch provided on
the fuel filler pump. Never jam the latch
open with some other object.

WARNING
If a flash fire occurs during refuelling, leave
the nozzle in the vehicle fill pipe and back
away from the vehicle. Notify the station
attendant at once so that all dispensing
devices and pumps can be shut off with
emergency controls. If the facility is
unattended, use the emergency intercom to
summon help and the emergency shutdown
H6163G
button to shut off the pump.

152
R

Fuel and Refuelling


Press and release the left side of the fuel filler
flap to open (shown in inset).

1 2

H6166G

Insert the pump nozzle (1) into the filler neck,


pushing aside the spring-loaded cover (2).
When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle
H6164G and replace the cap. Tighten the cap clockwise
until you hear it click three times.
The fuel filler flap springs out revealing the filler
cap. Caution: When replacing the fuel filler cap
ensure that it is tightened until it clicks three
times. Failure to do so may result in the
engine warning lamp illuminating due to
evaporative emission levels increasing.

PREMIUM
TIGHTEN UNTIL CAP CLICKS UNLEADED FUEL ONLY
OR ENGINE LIGHT MAY COME ON
SEE OWNERS GUIDE
ESSENCE PREMIUM
SANS PLOMB
SEULEMENT
H6165G

Unscrew the filler cap and place it on the


projection on top of the hinge of the fuel filler
flap.

H6412N

153
L

Fuel and Refuelling


TYPE OF FUEL Note: Mid or regular grade gasoline with a CLC
or AKI octane rating of not lower than 87 may
also be used, but performance and fuel
IMPORTANT INFORMATION economy will be reduced.
ONLY USE PREMIUM UNLEADED FUEL If heavy engine knock is detected when using
• Unleaded fuel is essential for proper the recommended octane rated fuel, or if steady
operation of the emission control engine knocking is present while maintaining a
system. steady speed on level roads, contact your
Dealer for advice.
Caution: DO NOT use leaded fuel. Your
engine is designed to use unleaded fuel Note: An occasional, light, engine knock while
ONLY. accelerating or climbing hills is acceptable.
• Even a very small quantity of leaded Octane enhancers
fuel will damage your vehicle's The use of octane enhancers is not
emission control system and could recommended and may invalidate the vehicle
invalidate the emissions warranty. In warranty.
addition, leaded fuel will damage the
Note: Reformulated gasoline and gasoline that
oxygen sensors in the fuel injection
contain detergents, anti-corrosion and stability
system and also seriously damage the
additives are recommended - they will help
catalyst in the catalytic converter.
your vehicle maintain the correct level of
Caution: DO NOT use fuel system cleaning emissions and engine performance.
agents, as many of these products can be
Driveability
harmful to gaskets and other materials
used in fuel system components. If you encounter driveability, starting and
stalling problems, especially in high ambient
temperatures or at high altitude when the
Octane requirements
engine is cold, it may be caused by poor quality
Premium unleaded gasoline with a CLC or AKI fuel. Try an alternative brand and if the problem
octane rating of 91 or higher should be used. persists, seek advice from your Dealer.
Note: Federal law requires that gasoline octane
Gasoline/oxygenated fuel blends
ratings be posted on the pumps. The Cost of
Living Council (CLC) octane rating or Anti To avoid invalidating the vehicle warranty, use
Knock Index (AKI) octane rating shown is an ONLY fuels blended within the following limits:
average of Research Octane Number (RON) and • Up to 15% of Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
Motor Octane Number (MON). (MTBE) and unleaded fuel mix.
Using unleaded fuel with an octane rating lower • Up to 15% of Ethyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
than that recommended, can cause persistent, (ETBE) and unleaded fuel mix.
heavy engine knock (a metallic rapping noise). • Up to 10% of Ethanol (Ethyl or grain
If severe, this can lead to engine damage. alcohol) and unleaded fuel mix.

154
R

Fuel and Refuelling


Methanol/unleaded fuel blends EMPTY FUEL TANK
In some areas, it is possible to buy unleaded Caution: DO NOT run the fuel tank dry.
fuel that is blended with up to 5% Methanol Running the fuel tank dry could create an
(Methyl or wood alcohol) and cosolvents and engine misfire capable of damaging the
corrosion preventatives. Using these blends engine, the catalytic converter or the fuel
can cause driveability problems and damage pump.
the fuel system components. Their use may
Note: Should the vehicle run out of fuel it will be
also invalidate the vehicle warranty.
necessary to add a minimum of 4 litres (1
WHEREVER POSSIBLE, AVOID USING FUEL
Gallon) of fuel in order to restart the vehicle. In
CONTAINING METHANOL!
some circumstances it will be necessary to
WARNING drive a short distance, typically 1.6 - 5
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury and kilometers (1 - 3 miles) in order for the vehicles
even death if misused. monitoring systems to register the additional
fuel.
Methanol/unleaded fuel blends, even in small
amounts, can cause blindness and possible FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM
death if swallowed. Additionally, take
In the event of an accident, the Supplementary
precautions to prevent methanol from coming
Restraint System (airbag system) may stop the
into contact with the skin.
operation of the fuel pump, depending on the
severity and type of the impact.
FUEL FILLING If this happens, the system must be reset
Gas station pumps are equipped with automatic before attempting to restart the engine.
cut-off sensing to avoid fuel spillage. Fill the
tank SLOWLY until the filler nozzle Resetting the fuel cut-off system
automatically cuts-off the supply. WARNING
WARNING To avoid the possibility of fire or personal
DO NOT attempt to fill the tank beyond its injury, do not reset the Fuel Cut-off System if
maximum capacity. If the vehicle is parked on you see or smell fuel.
a slope, in direct sunlight or high ambient
temperature, expansion of the fuel can cause If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the system as
a spillage. follows:
1. Turn the starter switch to position 0 and
The reduced diameter filler neck accepts ONLY wait for 1 minute.
a narrow filler nozzle of the type found on 2. Turn the starter switch to position ll and
pumps that supply UNLEADED fuel. wait for 30 seconds.
Note: Ensure the filler cap is fitted correctly 3. Make a further check for fuel leaks.
after refuelling.Tighten the cap until it clicks 3
4. If no leak is found, start the engine as
times.
normal.

155
L

Park Distance Control


Park Distance Control

USING PARK DISTANCE The vehicle is fitted with four ultrasonic sensors
CONTROL (PDC) on each of the bumpers. (Some vehicles are
fitted with sensors only in the rear bumpers.)
The range of the front sensors, and the two
sensors on the corners of the rear bumper is
approximately 0.6 metres (2 feet). The two
center rear sensors have a range of
approximately 1.5 metres (5 feet).
Caution: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice
and snow. If deposits build up on the surface
of the sensors, their performance may be
impaired. When washing the vehicle, avoid
aiming high pressure jets directly at the
sensors at close range.
PDC in operation
Caution: PDC is automatically switched off at
the rear when a trailer is attached to the
vehicle.
The distance from an obstruction is identified
by an intermittent tone sounding (higher pitch
for the front sensors and a lower pitch for the
rear). As the vehicle moves closer to an
obstruction, the repetition frequency of the
tones increases proportionally.
H6167G
When the distance between the sensor and the
Caution: The Park Distance Control is a obstruction is less than approximately 0.30
parking aid for guidance only. It remains the metres (1 foot), the tone becomes continuous.
driver’s responsibility to detect obstacles and
estimate the vehicle’s distance from them.
The sensors may not be able to detect certain
types of obstruction (narrow posts or small
narrow objects, small objects close to the
ground and some objects with dark,
non-reflective surfaces, for example). Always
be vigilant when reversing.
Park Distance Control (PDC) is a system that
assists the driver when manoeuvering the
vehicle into a parking space, or anywhere that
there are obstacles that need to be avoided,
warning the driver accordingly.

156
R

Park Distance Control


Activating PDC Note: The confirmation tone only sounds when
PDC is automatically activated whenever R the rear PDC is activated by selecting reverse,
(Reverse) is engaged, while the starter switch is or when the system is re-activated by pressing
turned on. the switch.
If R is selected, both front and rear sets of If a long, high-pitched tone sounds and the
sensors become activated and a short switch indicator flashes when PDC is activated,
confirmation tone sounds after one second. then a system fault has been detected - first
check that the sensors on the bumpers are not
In R, the sensors remain on regardless of
obscured by dirt, ice or snow. If the fault
speed.
persists after cleaning the sensors, contact
If the driver selects Neutral N from Reverse R, your Land Rover Dealer for assistance.
both sets of sensors remain active.
Selection of Park P, or turning on the EPB while
the vehicle is stationary, will override other
inputs and turn off the PDC system.

1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

1 ABC
2 3
DEF

H6358N

The system can also be manually selected by


pressing the switch (illustrated) on the center
front instrument panel. The switch indicator
illuminates and a short tone sounds as
confirmation.
A second press of the switch deactivates the
system. The system is reset if the starter switch
is turned off and on again.

157
L

Automatic Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION USE
Automatic Transmission

Starting
The engine can only be started with the selector
lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions.
• ALWAYS apply the parkbrake and foot
brake before starting the engine.
AUTO

1 2
ABC
3
DEF

4 5 6


GHI JKL MNO
CD 3
7 8 9

KEEP THE BRAKES APPLIED while moving


PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

the selector lever into a drive D position


(the selector lever cannot be moved from
the P or N position unless the foot brake is
applied).
Note: If rearward pressure is applied to the
selector lever before the foot brake is
applied, any gear selected may not be
available irrespective of the lever position.
In this situation, return the lever to its
previous position, ensure that the foot
brake is applied, and select the required
gear.
• The selector release button (see inset) H6171L

must be pressed while selecting P and R,


and also to enable the lever to be moved WARNING
between the P and R positions. To reduce the risk of inadvertent vehicle
• DO NOT rev the engine or allow it to run movement when parked, always leave the
above normal idle speed while selecting D vehicle with the gear selector in P (Park)
or R, or while the vehicle is stationary with position, as well as applying the parkbrake.
any gear selected.
Note: The gear selector lever MUST be in the P
• ALWAYS keep the brakes applied until you
position before the starter key can be removed.
are ready to move off - remember, once a
drive gear has been selected, an automatic
vehicle will tend to creep forward (or
backward if reverse is selected).
• DO NOT allow the vehicle to remain
stationary for any length of time with a
drive gear selected and the engine running
(always select N if the engine is to idle for a
prolonged period).
Caution: Vehicles fitted with automatic
transmission can NOT be push or tow started.

158
R

Automatic Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION R - Reverse
Selector lever positions Before selecting Reverse, ensure that the
An LED indicator on the selector panel and a vehicle is stationary, with the foot brake
number or letter on the gear selector display in applied. The selector release button MUST be
the instrument pack, identify the selected gear pressed before moving the selector lever into
position. Reverse position.
N - Neutral
Select Neutral when the vehicle is stationary
and the engine is required to idle for a brief
period (at traffic lights, for example). In Neutral,
the transmission is not locked, so the parkbrake
must be applied whenever N is selected.
If the vehicle remains stationary, the selector
lever becomes locked in Neutral and it is then
necessary to depress the foot brake pedal in
order to release the selector lever.
Press the selector release button and foot brake
to move from Neutral to Reverse or Drive.
D - Drive
Select for all normal driving; full automatic gear
changing occurs on all six forward gears,
according to road speed and accelerator
position.
Note: For maximum air conditioning
performance while stationary, select P or N.
Caution: DO NOT select P or R if the vehicle is
H6173G moving.
P - Park DO NOT select a forward drive gear when the
This position locks the transmission and should vehicle is moving backwards.
be selected before switching the engine off. To DO NOT select reverse gear when the vehicle
avoid transmission damage, ensure that the is moving forwards.
vehicle is completely stationary, with the
parkbrake applied, before selecting P.
The selector release button MUST be pressed
before moving the selector lever into, or out of,
the P position.

159
L

Automatic Transmission
Kick-down in automatic mode
To provide rapid acceleration, e.g. for
overtaking, push the accelerator pedal to the
full extent of its travel (this is known as
kick-down), a click will be felt through the
accelerator pedal. Up to a certain speed, this
will cause an immediate downshift to the lowest
appropriate gear, followed by rapid
acceleration. Once the pedal is relaxed, normal
gear change speeds will resume (dependent
upon road speed and accelerator pedal
position).
Note: Moderate accelerator pressure may also
result in a downshift in the transmission,
depending on vehicle speed.
Sport mode
In Sport mode, full automatic progression
through the gear ratios is retained and the
transmission will stay in the lower gears for
longer. This improves mid-range performance
with downshifts occurring more readily.
H6175G

To select Sport mode, move the gear lever from


the D position towards the left hand side of the
vehicle (see illustration). The word SPORT will
appear in the gear selector display in the
instrument pack (for approximately 6 seconds)
and the LED in the selector display to the side
of the selector lever (arrowed in inset)
illuminates.
Sport mode can be deselected at any time, by
returning the lever to the D position.
To return to Sport mode after CommandShift
has been selected move the selector into the D
position. Then move it back into Sport mode.
Note: Sport mode will be available only with
Terrain Response Special Programs off. i.e the
rotary knob is not in the raised position.

160
R

Automatic Transmission
CommandShift TM 3. A single forward (+) movement and release
CommandShift gear selection can be used as of the selector lever will change the
an alternative to fully automatic transmission transmission to a higher gear, while
and is particularly effective when rapid rearward (-) movement and release of the
acceleration or engine braking are required. lever will change down to a lower gear. The
selected gear will be indicated in the gear
selector display in the instrument pack (see
inset).
4. To deselect CommandShift, simply move
the selector lever sideways, back to the D
position. Automatic gear changing will then
resume.
Note: In CommandShift, kick-down is still
available for increased acceleration. See
Kick-down in automatic mode, 160.
Note: When the Terrain Response system is
used, the automatic transmission will go
straight into CommandShift if the lever is
moved into Sport/CommandShift in any Special
Program.
Using CommandShift in HIGH range
If CommandShift is selected in HIGH range, 1st
gear must be selected to move off from
stationary. Normal sequential gear changing
can be utilised once the vehicle is moving.
H6177G Using CommandShift in LOW range
If CommandShift is selected in LOW range, the
1. With D selected, move the gear selector
vehicle can move off from stationary in 1st, 2nd
from the D position towards the left-hand
or 3rd gear - this is particularly useful to
side of the vehicle.
improve traction when driving off-road.
2. The transmission then automatically
selects the ratio most appropriate to the Kick-down in CommandShift
vehicle's road speed and accelerator When in CommandShift, kick-down overrides
position. Move the selector forward (+) or the manual gear selection, to provide increased
backward (-) and release will manually acceleration.
select a higher or lower gear (when In HIGH range, with CommandShift selected,
available). The message TRANSMISSION kick-down will cause a downshift to the lowest
COMMANDSHIFT SELECTED appears in gear possible for the current speed.
the main message center.

161
L

Automatic Transmission
ELECTRONICALLY SELECTED High coolant temperature mode
AUTOMATIC MODES In high ambient temperatures during extreme
In fully automatic mode or CommandShift load conditions, it is possible for the engine and
mode (not available in sport mode) the the gearbox to overheat. At a certain
transmission control system will electronically temperature the transmission will select a gear
adjust gear change points to suit a variety of change pattern designed to aid the cooling
driving conditions. process, whilst enabling the gearbox to
continue performing normally in high
Hill ascent, trailer and high altitude mode temperatures.
A suitable gear change pattern is selected to Note: When the Terrain Response system is
retain lower gears for longer. This is to counter used, automatic transmission change
momentum loss caused by more frequent gear points/patterns will change depending on
changing during hill ascent or when towing. which mode has been selected.
This gear change pattern is also selected at high
altitudes to combat reduced engine torque. Limp-home mode
Should the transmission develop a fault, F is
Hill descent mode displayed in the gear position display and only
When in manual CommandShift mode, with the limited gears are available. Seek immediate
optimum gear for engine braking selected, the assistance from your Land Rover Dealer.
selector lever can then be moved across to the
D position. The transmission will retain the
previously selected manual gear until the
descent is completed, then the transmission
will automatically change to D.

162
R

Transfer Gearbox
Transfer Gearbox

TRANSFER GEARBOX
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically
controlled transfer gearbox allowing the driver
to select HIGH or LOW range driving gears.
AUTO

HIGH range 1
4
GHI

7
PQRS
2
ABC

5
JKL

8
TUV
3
DEF

6
MNO

9
WXYZ
CD 3
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

HIGH range should be used for all normal road


driving and also for off-road driving across dry,
level terrain.
LOW range
LOW range should ONLY be used in situations
where low speed manoeuvering is necessary,
such as reversing a trailer or negotiating a
boulder-strewn river bed, or when moving off
while heavily loaded or towing.
Also use LOW range for more extreme off-road
conditions, such as steep ascents and
descents. DO NOT attempt to use the LOW
range for normal road driving.
Using the transfer gearbox H6179L

The recommended method of changing range While the vehicle is in HIGH range, the range
is with the vehicle stationary. For vehicles indicator lamp in the instrument pack display is
equipped with a message center, the messages extinguished and the HIGH range indicator
displayed will assist the experienced driver in lamp at the switch is illuminated.
carrying out a range change on-the-move. See The range indicator lamp in the instrument pack
Range changing on the move, 165 display illuminates continuously to act as a
Stationary method reminder that LOW range is engaged. It flashes
With the vehicle stationary and the engine to indicate a range change in progress and
running, apply the foot brake and move the extinguishes once the vehicle is in HIGH range.
automatic gearbox selector to the N (neutral)
position before moving the transfer gear switch
towards the range required (HIGH or LOW).
When the switch is released, it returns to the
central position.

163
L

Transfer Gearbox

H6194G H6195G

While a HIGH to LOW range change is in While a LOW to HIGH range change is in
progress, the HIGH range indicator lamp at the progress, the LOW range indicator lamp at the
switch will remain illuminated. The LOW range switch will remain illuminated. The HIGH range
indicator lamps at both the switch and the indicator lamps at both the switch and the
instrument pack display will flash. instrument pack display will flash.
When the range change is complete, the HIGH When the range change is complete, the LOW
range indicator lamp at the switch extinguishes. range indicator lamp at both the switch and the
The LOW range indicator lamps at both the instrument pack display extinguishes. The
switch and the instrument pack display will HIGH range indicator lamp at the switch will
illuminate constantly. illuminate constantly.
A warning chime will sound, and LOW RANGE A warning chime will sound, and HIGH RANGE
ENGAGED is displayed in the main message ENGAGED is displayed in the main message
center for a few seconds. center for a few seconds.

164
R

Transfer Gearbox
Range changing on the move Transmission fault message
Note: If the vehicle speed is too high when a If a fault occurs within the transmission, a
range change is requested, a warning chime message will be displayed in the main message
sounds and SPEED TOO HIGH FOR RANGE center.
CHANGE appears in the main message center.
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
If N is not selected before using the transfer
gear switch, the message SELECT NEUTRAL Caution: DO NOT use auxiliary equipment,
FOR RANGE CHANGE is displayed and a such as roller generators, that are driven by
warning chime sounds. only one or two wheels of the vehicle, as they
will cause failure of the transfer gearbox.
Note: Do not attempt to make moving range
changes at speeds of 3 km/h (2 mph) or less.
Changing from HIGH to LOW on the move
With the vehicle slowing down and travelling
NO FASTER THAN 40 km/h (24 mph), first
select N in the main gearbox. Press the rear of
the transfer gear switch to the LOW position
and release it.
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the Stationary method.
Now select D or manual CommandShiftTM
mode. The transmission interlock prevents the
engagement of a drive gear until the range
change is complete.
Changing from LOW to HIGH on the move
With the vehicle travelling NO FASTER THAN
60 km/h (38 mph), select N in the main
gearbox. Press the front of the transfer gear
switch to the HIGH position and release it.
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the stationary method.
Now select D (drive). The transmission
interlock prevents the engagement of a drive
gear until the range change is complete.
Caution: If the range change indicator lamp
still flashes when the starter key is turned
from position ll to position l, apply the
parkbrake.

165
L

Cruise Control
Cruise Control

CRUISE CONTROL Caution: Always observe the following


Cruise control enables the driver to maintain a precautions:
constant road speed without using the • DO NOT use cruise control in traffic
accelerator pedal. This is particularly useful for conditions where a constant speed cannot
highway cruising or for any journey where a easily be maintained.
constant speed can be maintained for a lengthy • DO NOT use cruise control on winding or
period. slippery road surfaces, or in off-road
conditions such as rough tracks or on
sand.
4 • Use of Sport mode is not recommended
when cruise control is selected.
3
Note: Cruise control is NOT available when the
vehicle is being driven in LOW range.
2
1 It is also not available when using the Terrain
Response system, when Mud Ruts, Sand or
Rock Crawl is selected and also when Hill
Descent Control (HDC) is selected.
To operate
Accelerate until the desired cruising speed is
reached. This must be above the system's
AUTO
operational minimum speed of 30 km/h
(18 mph).
Press the + switch (4) to set the vehicle speed
in the system's memory. Cruise control will
now maintain that road speed.
The warning indicator in the
H6183L
instrument pack illuminates. With
The steering wheel switches operate as follows: cruise control operating, speed can
1. CANCEL: Cancels without erasing be increased by normal use of the accelerator
memorised speed. e.g. for overtaking. When the accelerator is
released, road speed will return to the
2. RESUME: Resume set speed.
previously set cruising speed.
3. SET - : Set the speed (-) or decrease.
Note: When cruise control speed is set and the
4. SET + : Set the speed (+) or increase. accelerator pedal is pressed for more than 60
seconds, cruise control will be cancelled.

166
R

Cruise Control
A speed can be stored whilst the vehicle speed Increasing the set cruising speed
is below 30 km/h (18 mph), or the vehicle is Press and hold the + switch (4); the vehicle will
stationary with the gear selector in D or N. Once accelerate. Release the switch as soon as the
the vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h (18 mph) desired speed is reached.
the set speed can be achieved by pressing the
The vehicle speed at the point of switch release
resume switch (2).
becomes the new set speed.
Suspending cruise control Alternatively, the set speed can be increased
Cruise control can be suspended by a single incrementally by tapping the + switch (4). Each
press of the CANCEL switch (1). The warning press of the switch will increase the speed by
indicator in the instrument pack extinguishes. 2 km/h (1 mph).
Cruise control will also suspend when the brake A further alternative is to increase speed by
pedal is pressed, when the gear selector is normal use of the accelerator. When the desired
moved into neutral or if HDC or DSC becomes speed is reached, press the + switch (4) to set
active. the cruise control.
To resume cruise control at the previously set Note: If the accelerator pedal is pressed to
speed, press the RESUME switch (2). increase speed, but the + switch (4) is not
Note: The set speed will NOT be erased by pressed, cruise control will be cancelled after
pressing the CANCEL switch (1). The set speed 60 seconds.
will only be erased when the starter switch is
WARNING
turned to position 0, or the gear selector lever
When setting cruise control to the speed limit
is moved to R or P.
it is important to remember that it is possible
Reducing the cruise speed for the vehicle speed to increase when
Press and hold the - switch (3); the vehicle will travelling downhill. This may result in the
decelerate. Release the switch as soon as the vehicle speed exceeding the speed limit.
desired speed is reached. The vehicle speed at The driver must ALWAYS ensure that a safe
the point of switch release becomes the new set speed is maintained below the speed limit,
speed. taking account of traffic and road conditions.
Alternatively, the set speed can be decreased
incrementally by tapping the - switch. Each
press of the switch will decrease the speed by
2 km/h (1 mph).

167
L

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) The radar sensor, mounted in the front bumper,
projects a beam directly forward to detect
WARNING objects ahead.
ACC is not a collision warning or avoidance • Only use ACC when conditions are
system. Additionally, ACC will not detect: favourable, that is, straight, dry, open
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles below roads with light traffic.
10 km/h (6 mph). • Do not use in poor visibility, specifically
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway. fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane. • Do not use on icy or slippery roads.
• It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) utilises a drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
radar sensor to maintain a gap between your at all times.
vehicle and a vehicle ahead or a set road speed
if there is no vehicle ahead within radar range. • Keep the front of the vehicle free from dirt,
The gap can be adjusted to one of four distance metal badges or objects, including vehicle
settings to suit your driving style and any speed front protectors, which may prevent the
between 30 km/h (18 mph) and 180 km/h sensor from operating.
(110 mph) can be stored in the ACC memory. • Do not use ACC when entering or leaving a
When ACC is active, a set gap can be highway.
maintained behind a leading vehicle even if your
stored speed is higher. If the road situation
allows you to move into an adjacent lane, your
vehicle will automatically accelerate up to your
stored speed as long as there is no vehicle
ahead within radar range.

H6344G

168
R

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Steering wheel switches Setting a speed
The system is operated by switches mounted Accelerate as normal until the required speed is
on the steering wheel. The driver can also reached.
intervene at any time by use of the foot brake or Press the SET + button (4) briefly and the
accelerator pedals. vehicle speed will then be stored in the memory
and the system activated. The set speed will be
displayed on the message center,
6 e.g. SETSPEED 80KM/H 50MPH.
5 Entering the follow mode

WARNING
4
When in follow mode the vehicle will not
3
decelerate automatically to a stop, nor will
the vehicle always decelerate quickly enough
2 to avoid a collision without driver
1 intervention.

Once a set speed has been selected, the driver


can release the accelerator and the set road
speed will be maintained.
When a vehicle ahead enters the same lane or a
slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane and
AUTO
travelling in the same direction, the vehicle
speed will be adjusted automatically until the
gap to the vehicle ahead corresponds to the
preset gap. The vehicle is now in follow mode.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster will be illuminated.
H6345L

The steering wheel switches operate as follows: CRUISE GAP The message center will
1. CANCEL: Cancels without erasing <-->
display the gap set.
memorised speed.
2. RESUME: Resume set speed.
3. SET - : Set the speed (-) or decrease.
4. SET + : Set the speed (+) or increase.
5. GAP <---> : Gap increase.
6. GAP <-> : Gap decrease.

169
L

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


The vehicle will maintain the constant time gap Low speed automatic switch off
to the vehicle ahead until: If the speed of the vehicle decreases below
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed 30 km/h (18 mph), the ACC system will be
above the set speed. automatically switched OFF and the instrument
• The vehicle ahead moves out of lane or out warning lamp will go out.
of view. If the brakes were being applied by the ACC
• The vehicle ahead slows so that low speed system, they will be slowly released.
automatic switch off occurs. This will be accompanied by an audible
• A new gap distance is set. warning, and DRIVER INTERVENE will be
displayed on the message center. The driver
If necessary, the vehicle brakes will be must take control.
automatically applied to slow the vehicle to
maintain the gap to the vehicle in front. Overriding the set speed/follow mode
The maximum braking which is applied by the WARNING
ACC system is limited and can be overridden by Whenever the driver is overriding the ACC by
the driver applying the brakes, if required. depressing the accelerator pedal, the ACC
Note: Driver braking will cancel adaptive cruise will not automatically apply the brakes to
control. maintain separation from any vehicle ahead.
If the ACC system predicts that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, then an The set speed and gap can be overridden by
audible warning will sound while the ACC pressing the accelerator pedal when cruising at
continues to brake. DRIVER INTERVENE will be constant speed or in follow mode. If the vehicle
displayed on the message center. The driver is in follow mode, the instrument warning lamp
should take IMMEDIATE action. will go out when the ACC is overridden by the
driver using the accelerator and CRUISE
When in follow mode the vehicle will
OVERRIDE will be displayed on the message
automatically return to the set speed when the
center. When the accelerator is released the
road ahead is clear, for instance when:
ACC function will operate again and vehicle
• The vehicle in front accelerates or changes speed will decrease to the set speed, or a lower
lane. speed if follow mode is active.
• The driver changes lane to either side or
enters an exit lane.
The driver should intervene if appropriate.

170
R

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Adjusting the gap The gap from the vehicle ahead can be
decreased or increased by pressing the switch
(5) or (6), on the steering wheel.
Four gap settings are available and the selected
gap setting will be displayed on the message
center when either button is pressed. After the
starter switch is turned ON the default gap will
be automatically selected ready for ACC
operation.
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to select a
gap appropriate to the driving conditions.
Adjusting the set speed
There are three ways to change the set speed:
AUTO
• Accelerate or brake to the required speed
and press the SET + button (4).
• Increase or decrease the speed by pressing
and holding either the SET + or - button (4)
or (3) until the required set speed is shown
on the message center. The vehicle speed
H6351L will gradually change to the selected speed.
• Increase or decrease the speed in steps of
2 km/h (1 mph) by briefly pressing the SET
CRUISE GAP
<->
+ or - button (4) or (3).
ACC operates between approximately 30 km/h
CRUISE GAP and 180 km/h (18 mph and 110 mph)
<--> dependent on the country specification.
Set speeds outside this range will not be
CRUISE GAP captured.
<--->
The ACC may apply the brakes to slow down the
CRUISE GAP
vehicle to the new set speed. The new set speed
<----> will be displayed on the message center for four
seconds after it has been changed.

EXT 72 F

TRIP 134.5 MILES

H6388N

171
L

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


ACC automatic switch off Forward alert
ACC will disengage, but not clear the memory Limited detection and warning of vehicles
when: ahead is provided during ACC operation by the
• The CANCEL button (1), is pressed. ACC DRIVER INTERVENE warning. The forward
alert feature additionally provides warnings
• The brake pedal is pressed.
whilst ACC is not engaged; if a vehicle is
• The vehicle speed falls below 30 km/h (18 detected close ahead, then the warning tone
mph). and message will be issued. The brakes will not
• Neutral is selected. be applied.
• Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) activates.
• Electronic Traction Control (ETC) activates.
• Hill Descent Control (HDC) is selected.
ACC will disengage, and clear the memory
when:

1 2 3

The starter switch is set to position 0.


ABC DEF 6CD-465

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43


1 2 3 4 5 6
0

Maximum vehicle speed is reached.


• A fault occurs in the ACC system.
Resuming the set speed/follow mode
By pressing the resume button (2), after ACC
has been cancelled, for example, after braking,
the ACC will become active again provided that
the set speed memory has not been erased. The
6CD-465
set speed will be displayed for four seconds and
the original set speed will be resumed, unless a H6347G
vehicle ahead causes the follow mode to
This additional feature may be switched on or
become active.
off using the forward alert switch as indicated.
Caution: RESUME should only be used if the
When the indicator lamp in the switch is on,
driver is aware of the set speed and intends to
forward alert is active.
return to it.

172
R

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Driving with ACC active
FWD ALERT
The system acts by regulating the speed of the
<-> vehicle using engine control and the brakes.
Gear changes may occur in response to
FWD ALERT deceleration or acceleration whilst in ACC.
<--> ACC is not a collision avoidance system,
however, during some situations the system
FWD ALERT may provide the driver with an indication that
<---> intervention is required.
An audible alarm will sound, accompanied by
FWD ALERT
the message DRIVER INTERVENE if the ACC
<---->
detects:
• A failure has occurred whilst the system is
EXT 23 C
active.
• That using maximum ACC braking only is
TRIP 274.5 km not sufficient.
• That the vehicle speed has decreased
H6407L
below the minimum for ACC operation.
Note:
The sensitivity of the warning may be changed:
• ACC operates when the gear selector lever
• Press the gap decrease button when ACC is
is in position D.
disengaged to display and then decrease
the sensitivity of the alert. • When engaged, the accelerator pedal rests
in the raised position. Fully release the
• Press the gap increase button to display
pedal to allow normal ACC operation.
and then increase the sensitivity of the
alert. • When braking is applied by the ACC the
brake pedal may move down and up as
Both of these alerts are accompanied by the
braking is applied or removed. The vehicle
FWD ALERT <----> message in the message
brake lamps will be switched on while
center.
braking is applied.

173
L

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Detection limitations ACC failure
If a fault occurs during operation of the system
A in cruise or follow modes, the ACC system will
switch OFF and cannot be used until the fault is
cleared. The message DRIVER INTERVENE
appears briefly, and is then replaced by the
message CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE.
B If failure of the ACC or any related system
occurs at any other time the message CRUISE
NOT AVAILABLE will be displayed. It will not be
possible to activate the ACC system in any
mode.
Accumulations of dirt, snow or ice on the
C sensor or cover may inhibit ACC operation.
Fitting of a vehicle front protector or metallised
badges may also affect ACC operation.
If this occurs in ACC cruise/follow mode, the
audible alarm sounds and the message DRIVER
INTERVENE appears briefly. The message ACC
H6181L
SENSOR BLOCKED is then displayed. The
Detection limitations can occur: system is no longer active.
• When driving on a different line to the Clearing the obstruction allows the system to
vehicle in front (A). return to normal operation. If the obstruction is
• With vehicles which edge into your lane present when ACC is inactive, e.g. on initial
which can only be detected once they have starting or with the ACC system switched off,
moved fully into your lane (B). the message ACC SENSOR BLOCKED will be
displayed.
• There may be issues with the detection of
vehicles in front when going into and Tires other than those recommended may have
coming out of a bend (C). different sizes. This can affect the correct
operation of the ACC.
In these cases ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver should stay alert and
intervene if necessary.

174
R

Brakes
Brakes

FOOT BRAKE WARNING


The hydraulic braking system operates through DO NOT rest your foot on the brake pedal
dual circuits. If one circuit should fail, the other while travelling as this may overheat the
will continue to function. brakes, reduce their efficiency and cause
However, in the event of brake failure where excessive wear.
only one circuit is operational, the vehicle NEVER allow the vehicle to freewheel with the
should only be driven at slow speed to the engine turned off as full braking assistance
nearest Land Rover Dealer. will not be available. The brakes will still
In these circumstances, exercise extreme function, but more pressure will be required
caution and be aware that increased brake to operate them.
pedal travel, greater pedal pressure, and longer If the RED brake warning indicator should
stopping distances will be experienced. illuminate while the vehicle is in motion,
bring the vehicle to a halt as quickly as traffic
Servo assistance
conditions and safety allow and seek
The braking system is servo assisted, but ONLY qualified assistance before continuing, see
when the engine is running. Without this Warning Indicators, 93.
assistance greater braking effort is necessary to
safely control the vehicle, resulting in longer NEVER place non-approved floor matting or
stopping distances. Always observe the any other obstructions under the brake pedal.
following precautions: This restricts pedal travel and braking
efficiency.
• ALWAYS take particular care when being
towed with the engine turned off.
Wet conditions
• If the engine should stop for any reason
Driving through water or even very heavy rain
while the vehicle is in motion, bring the
may adversely affect braking efficiency. Always
vehicle to a halt as quickly as traffic
dry the braking surfaces by intermittent light
conditions safely allow, and DO NOT pump
application of the brakes, first ensuring that you
the brake pedal as the braking system may
are at a safe distance from other road users.
lose any remaining assistance available.

175
L

Brakes
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES (ABS) WARNING
The purpose of the anti-lock braking system ABS cannot overcome the physical limitations
(ABS) is to allow efficient braking without wheel of braking distance, or the danger of
locking - thereby, dependent upon road aquaplaning, i.e. where a layer of water
conditions, allowing the driver to retain steering prevents adequate contact between the tires
control of the vehicle. and the road surface.
Under normal braking conditions, where The fact that a vehicle is fitted with ABS must
sufficient road surface friction exists to slow never tempt the driver into taking risks that
the vehicle without the wheels locking, ABS will could affect safety. In all cases, it remains the
not be activated. However, if the wheels begin driver's responsibility to drive within
to lock under braking, then ABS will reasonable safety margins, having due
automatically come into operation. This will be consideration for prevailing weather and
recognisable by a rapid pulsation felt through traffic conditions.
the brake pedal. The driver should always take account of the
In an emergency situation, ABS functions most surface to be travelled over and the fact that
effectively when full braking effort is applied brake pedal reactions will be different to
even when the road surface is slippery. The ABS those experienced on a non-ABS vehicle.
system constantly monitors the speed of each
wheel and varies the brake pressure to each, Warning indicator
according to the available grip.
A fault with the ABS system is
• DO NOT pump the brake pedal at any time; indicated by illumination of the
this will interrupt operation of the system amber ABS warning indicator. If
and may increase the stopping distance. the indicator illuminates, drive with care,
• NEVER place additional floor matting or avoiding heavy brake applications and seek
any other obstruction under the brake qualified assistance urgently. For further
pedal. This restricts pedal travel and may information on the functionality of the ABS
impair brake efficiency. warning indicator, see Anti-lock Braking
No matter how hard you brake, dependent upon System (ABS) - AMBER, 97.
road conditions, you should be able to continue
steering the vehicle as normal.

176
R

Brakes
Off-road driving Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)
While anti-lock braking will operate in off-road If rapid full brake application is made, EBA
driving conditions, on certain surfaces total automatically boosts the braking force to the
reliance on the system may be unwise. It cannot maximum and helps to stop the vehicle. Also, if
reliably compensate for driver error or the driver brakes more slowly, but with
inexperience on difficult off-road surfaces. sufficient brake pressure to activate ABS on
Note the following: both front wheels, the system automatically
increases the braking force so that all four
• On soft or deep surfaces such as powdery
wheels are in ABS control, optimising the
snow, sand or gravel, and on extremely
performance of the ABS system.
rough ground, the braking distance
required by the anti-lock braking system Pressure should be maintained on the brake
may be greater than for normal braking, pedal during the entire brake application. If the
even though improved steering would be brake pedal is released, EBA will cease
experienced. This is because the natural operation.
action of locked wheels on soft surfaces is A fault with the EBA system is indicated by
to build up a wedge of surface material in illumination of the amber brake warning
front which assists the wheels to stop. indicator. See INDICATOR GROUPING, 93.
• If the vehicle is stopped on a very steep In the event of a fault, the system should be
slope where little traction is available, it checked by a Land Rover Dealer at the earliest
may slide with the wheels locked as there is opportunity.
no wheel rotation to provide a signal to the
Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD)
ABS. To counteract this, briefly release the
brakes to permit some wheel movement, Your vehicle is equipped with Electronic Brake
then re-apply the brakes to allow ABS to Distribution (EBD), which balances the
gain control. distribution of braking forces between front and
rear axles to maintain maximum braking
• Before driving off-road, read and
efficiency under all vehicle loading conditions.
thoroughly understand the Off-road
driving handbook, available on-line at: For example; under light loads EBD applies less
http://www.ownerinfo.landrover.com. effort to the rear brakes to maintain vehicle
stability; conversely allowing full braking effort
to the rear wheels when the vehicle is towing or
is heavily laden.
A fault with the EBD system is indicated by
illumination of the red brake warning indicator.
If this illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, gently stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits and seek qualified assistance.

177
L

Brakes
PARKBRAKE (EPB) It is important to confirm that the red indicator
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrically is continuously illuminated (not flashing). This
operated parkbrake (EPB). indicates that the parkbrake has been correctly
applied. If the lever is operated while the vehicle
is travelling at less than 3 km/h, the vehicle will
1 be brought to a stop abruptly. The vehicle stop
lamps will not illuminate.
If the system detects a fault with the parkbrake,
the amber parkbrake warning indicator will
illuminate and the message PARKBRAKE
FAULT will appear on the instrument pack. If a
fault is detected while EPB is operated, the red
warning indicator will flash and the amber
2 indicator will illuminate. Also the message
PARKBRAKE FAULT. SYSTEM NOT
FUNCTIONAL will appear in the main message
center. The red indicator will continue to be
illuminated for at least ten seconds after the
starter switch has been switched off.

WARNING
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake system to hold
the vehicle stationary if the amber parkbrake
warning indicator is illuminated and/or the
red warning indicator is flashing. Seek
qualified assistance urgently.

Dynamic operation
In an emergency, the parkbrake can be applied
dynamically, i.e. with the vehicle travelling at
H6185L more than 3 km/h (2 mph). Pulling up on the
lever and holding it up gives a gradual reduction
Applying the parkbrake manually in speed. The brake warning indicator will
With the vehicle stationary, pull up the lever (1) illuminate accompanied by a harsh sound and
located alongside the gear selector, and release CAUTION! PARKBRAKE APPLIED appears in
it. The lever will return to the neutral position the main message center. The stop lamps will
and the red parkbrake warning indicator in the illuminate.
instrument pack will illuminate. Releasing or depressing the lever will cancel the
parkbrake application.

178
R

Brakes
The parkbrake should not be used regularly to To delay the automatic release feature, hold the
decelerate the vehicle or to bring it to a lever in the apply position, then at the desired
standstill; this facility is intended for emergency point, release it.
use only. To assist in a smooth drive-away, the system
Caution: Driving the vehicle with the anticipates the requirement and reduces the
parkbrake applied (other than in the system load depending on the gradient. (It may
emergency situation described above) or be possible to hear this pre-arm operation.)
repeated use of the parkbrake to decelerate If the reduction in load causes the vehicle to
the vehicle may cause serious damage to the move after a valid gear is engaged, the full
brake system. system load will be re-applied to the parkbrake.
Releasing the parkbrake manually This may cause a small reduction in the
refinement of the subsequent drive-away. It is
To disengage the parkbrake, the starter key
also possible to override this load reduction by
must be in position I or II. Apply pressure to the
lifting the parkbrake lever after gear
foot brake while pressing down on the
engagement.
parkbrake lever.
In the event of a fault, PARKBRAKE FAULT.
It is not possible to manually release the
AUTO RELEASE NOT FUNCTIONAL will appear
parkbrake without pressing the foot brake.
in the main message center. In this event,
If the parkbrake cannot be released manually, release the parkbrake manually.
seek qualified assistance immediately.
Under most conditions the EPB system will
WARNING release seamlessly as the accelerator is applied,
The parkbrake operates on the rear wheels of allowing the vehicle to move forward. However,
the vehicle and hence secure parking of the release times may be extended for an initial
vehicle is dependent on being on a hard and time period at the start of a journey when
stable surface. changing into gear from P or N. This is normal
and is to allow for the extended gear
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake to operate
engagement times that may occur under certain
effectively if the vehicle has been subjected
circumstances.
to immersion in mud and water.
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake system to hold Fault management
the vehicle stationary if the amber parkbrake If a fault is diagnosed by the system when the
warning indicator is illuminated and/or the starter switch is on but the parkbrake is not in
red warning indicator is flashing. Seek use, the amber parkbrake warning indicator will
qualified assistance urgently. flash and the message PARKBRAKE FAULT will
be displayed in the message center.
Releasing the parkbrake automatically Note: Under some transmission fault
If the vehicle is stationary with the parkbrake conditions the parkbrake may not function, or
applied and in D or R, pressing the accelerator may not operate automatically.
will release the parkbrake and allow the vehicle
to move off.

179
L

Dynamic Stability and Traction Control


Dynamic Stability and Traction Control

DYNAMIC STABILITY Deactivating DSC operation


CONTROL (DSC) Land Rover recommend that DSC is operational
DSC helps to optimise dynamic stability, even in all normal driving conditions.
in critical driving situations. The system In some driving conditions, to maximise
controls dynamic stability when accelerating. traction, it may be beneficial to deactivate DSC.
Additionally, it identifies unstable driving Such conditions include:
behaviour, such as understeering and • To rock the vehicle out of a hollow or out of
oversteering and helps to keep the vehicle a soft surface.
under control by manipulating the engine
• Starting in deep snow or on a loose
output and applying the brakes at individual
surface.
wheels. Some noise may be generated when
the brakes are applied. The system is ready to • Driving in deep sand.
operate each time the engine is started. • Driving on tracks with deep longitudinal
ruts.
WARNING
• Driving through deep mud.
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is unable to
compensate for driver misjudgement. It
remains the driver’s responsibility to adopt a
suitable driving style in every driving
situation. Risks should never be taken on
account of the additional security afforded by
the DSC system. 1 2 3
ABC DEF 6CD-465

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

Warning indicator
The indicator illuminates briefly as
a bulb and system check when the
starter switch is turned to
position II.
If the warning indicator flashes, the system is
active, regulating engine output and brake
forces. 1 ABC
2 3
DEF

If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does H6357N


not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed,
a fault has been detected in the system. Any To deactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the
fault will deactivate DSC. Drive with care and DSC switch on the instrument panel (the DSC
seek qualified assistance urgently. warning indicator will illuminate continuously).
Deactivating DSC has no effect on traction
control operation.
Note: Driving with DSC deactivated, may add
additional loads on the brakes - always drive
with DSC switched on if possible.

180
R

Dynamic Stability and Traction Control


Reactivating DSC ELECTRONIC TRACTION
To reactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the CONTROL (ETC)
DSC switch on the instrument panel. DSC will ETC is continuously available to improve
automatically reactivate when the engine is vehicle traction when one or more wheels has a
started. tendency to spin, while others do not. It
DSC is reactivated automatically when the operates in conjunction with the DSC system.
program is changed on the Terrain Response If a wheel is spinning, ETC automatically brakes
system. that wheel until it regains grip. This braking
activity allows the engine power to be
transmitted to the remaining wheels. Some
noise may be generated when the brakes are
applied.
Warning indicator
A fault with the ETC system is
indicated by illumination of the
amber DSC warning indicator. This
could also indicate that the DSC has been
manually deactivated. See, INDICATOR
GROUPING, 93.
If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does
not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed,
a fault has been detected in the system. Any
fault will deactivate ETC. Drive with care and
seek qualified assistance urgently.

181
L

Hill Descent Control


Hill Descent Control

HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC)


Hill Descent Control (HDC) operates in
conjunction with the anti-lock braking system
to provide greater control in off-road situations
particularly when descending severe gradients.
AUTO

1 2
ABC
3
DEF

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3

HDC may be used in D, R and CommandShift 1


7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

in HIGH range and in D, R and all


CommandShift gears in LOW range. When in D,
the vehicle will automatically select the most
appropriate gear. The vehicle should not be
driven with the HDC active in N neutral.
Note: When using Terrain Response, some of
its program/range combinations will activate
HDC automatically.
Warning indicator
HDC can be selected at speeds
below 80 km/h (50 mph). The
green warning indicator will
illuminate continuously when vehicle speed
reduces below 50km/h (30mph) and full HDC H6192L

function is activated.
To select HDC
If the vehicle speed exceeds 80 km/h (50 mph),
HDC will deselect and the green HDC indicator Press and release the switch (arrowed) to
will extinguish. select HDC. To deselect, press and release
again.
If HDC is already selected and vehicle speed
rises above 50 km/h (30 mph) in HIGH range, The green information indicator will extinguish.
HDC function is suspended and the green HDC If HDC is deselected when HDC is operating, the
indicator will flash. A message will also appear system fades out, allowing the vehicle to
in the main message center. gradually increase in speed.
When used in LOW range, HDC controls the
vehicle speed more aggressively. Use LOW
range gears when steep descents are to be
attempted.
Note: HDC is automatically deselected if the
vehicle starter switch is turned off for more
than 6 hours.

182
R

Hill Descent Control


Hill Descent Control in action To increase the descent speed, press and hold
HDC should be used in conjunction with an the + switch. The vehicle speed at the point of
appropriate gear selection. switch release will become the new descent
speed. Alternatively, the descent speed can be
During a hill descent, if engine braking is
adjusted by tapping the + or - switches. Each
insufficient to control the vehicle speed, HDC
press of the switch will adjust the descent
automatically operates the brakes to slow the
speed by approximately 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph).
vehicle and maintain a speed relative to the
selected gear range and the accelerator pedal Note: Each gear has a pre-defined minimum
position. descent speed.
While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, Note: The descent speed will only increase if
descent speeds can be varied using the the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the
steering-wheel-mounted cruise control (1) + vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is
and (2) - switches, where fitted. To reduce the reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the +
descent speed, press and hold the - switch. The switch may result in no speed increase.
vehicle speed at the point of switch release will When driving off-road, HDC can be
become the new descent speed. permanently selected to ensure that control is
maintained. ABS and ETC are still fully
operational and will assist if the need arises.

1 Note: With HDC selected, gear changes can be


carried out in the normal way.
2
If the brake pedal is depressed when HDC is
active, HDC is overridden and the brakes will
perform as normal (a pulsation might be felt
through the brake pedal). If the brake pedal is
then released, HDC will recommence operating
at the speed at which the brakes were released.
In extreme circumstances, the HDC system
may cause brake temperatures to exceed their
pre-set limits. If this occurs, HDC
TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE SYSTEM
AUTO
COOLING will be displayed in the message
center. HDC will then fade out and become
temporarily inactive. HDC will not be available
until the brakes reach an acceptable
temperature, at which time the warning
message will disappear from the message
H6198L center and HDC will, if required, resume
operating.

183
L

Hill Descent Control


If a fault is detected in the HDC system, HDC
FAULT SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE will appear in
the main message center. If the fault is detected
while the system is active, HDC will fade out. Do
not attempt a steep descent when HDC is
unavailable or use a very low gear and/or the
foot brake. If a fault has been detected, consult
your Land Rover Dealer at the earliest
opportunity.
HDC fade-out
HDC fade-out gradually decreases the HDC
function with the effect that the rate of hill
descent will increase. HDC will be disabled
completely once the descent is complete.
If required (e.g. the angle of the descent levels
out significantly), fade-out may be achieved
deliberately by deselecting HDC while the
system is operating.
HDC Information indicator - GREEN
If HDC is selected and the operating conditions
are met, the indicator will illuminate
continuously to indicate HDC is able to operate.
If the indicator flashes while HDC is active, HDC
operating conditions are not met and the HDC is
not able to operate.

184
R

Air Suspension
Air Suspension

AIR SUSPENSION Access height


The air suspension system maintains the This is 50 mm (2.0 in.) lower than On-road
correct vehicle height by controlling the height. It provides easier entry, exit and loading
quantity of air in the vehicle’s air springs. of the vehicle.
Unless stated otherwise, height changes may
only be made while the engine is running and 55mm
the driver and passenger doors are closed.
When the air suspension system lifts the
vehicle, it normally uses compressed air stored 0mm
in its reservoir. The suspension will rise much
more slowly if this reservoir is depleted due to
repeated raising and lowering of the
suspension.
50mm
On-road height H6206G
The normal height for the vehicle.
Off-road height WARNING
The driver should ensure that the vehicle is
This is 55 mm (2.2 in.) higher than On-road
clear of obstacles and people before lowering
height. It provides improved ground clearance
the vehicle. Remember that, for example, the
and approach, departure and break-over
clearance under the floor and bumpers and in
angles. See DIMENSIONS, 298.
the wheel arches, will be 105 mm (4.1 in.)
Off-road height can be selected at any speed up less at Access height than at Off-road height.
to 40km/h (24 mph). When the system is at
Off-road height, the system will automatically The suspension will automatically rise from
select On-road height if the vehicle speed Access height when the vehicle speed exceeds
exceeds 50 km/h (30 mph). 10 km/h (6 mph).
Note: When using Terrain Response, some of If Access height was selected directly from
its programs/range combinations will adjust Off-road height, the system will return to
suspension height automatically. Off-road height when the vehicle speed exceeds
Extended mode 10 km/h (6 mph). Otherwise the system will lift
the suspension to On-road height.
If the vehicle is grounded while at off-road
height and traction control is induced, the
system raises the vehicle by 35mm to clear the
obstruction. Extended mode is activated
automatically and cannot be selected manually.

185
L

Air Suspension
High speed height Adjusting suspension heights
This feature lowers the suspension ride height
by 20mm if the vehicle exceeds 160 km/h 2
(100 mph) for five seconds. This action is
automatic and cannot be over-ridden. Ride 3
height will return to normal when vehicle speed
remains below 130 km/h (80 mph) for 30 4
seconds. 1
Note: NEVER exceed the speed limits. 5
Crawl (locked at Access height) 6
This mode enables the vehicle to be driven at
low speeds at Access height, to give increased
roof clearance e.g. in low car parks, etc.
Crawl can be selected when the vehicle speed is H6200G 7
below 35 km/h (22 mph). When the vehicle is in
Crawl, On-road height will be selected 1. Raise/lower switch
automatically if the vehicle speed exceeds 2. Raising indicator
40 km/h (24 mph).
3. Off-road indicator
Messages 4. On-road indicator
The main message center displays messages 5. Access indicator
relating to the air suspension system.
6. Lock indicator
For an explanation of those messages, see
7. Lowering indicator
MAIN MESSAGE CENTER, 79.
Press the bottom of the switch to lower, and the
top of the switch to raise, the suspension height
to the next available setting.
Indicators (3), (4) or (5) will be lit to show the
height selected. A message indicating the
suspension height will also be displayed in the
message center when Off-road, Access or
Crawl is selected.

186
R

Air Suspension
Suspension height indicators Selecting and cancelling Crawl (locked at
Indicators (2) or (7) will be lit to show the Access height)
direction of movement. They extinguish when
the height change movement is completed.
If a height change is requested that is not
allowed, such as attempting to raise the height
of the vehicle with the engine not running,
indicators (2) and (7) will flash twice and a
chime will sound. A message will be displayed 1
on the message center. 5
A flashing indicator (2) or (7) indicates that the
system is in a waiting state or shows that it will
6
automatically override the driver’s choice if
speed criteria are exceeded.
Selecting Access height H6201G
If Access height is selected while vehicle speed
When the suspension is at On-road or Access
is above 20 km/h (12 mph), indicators (5) and
height and the vehicle speed is below 35 km/h
(7) will flash while the system waits for the
(22 mph), press the raise/lower switch (1) in
vehicle to slow down. The system will cancel
the down direction for one second. Indicators
the Access height request, if the vehicle does
(5) and (6) will be lit to confirm the selection.
not slow sufficiently within one minute.
Crawl can be cancelled manually by pressing
When the vehicle slows down to 20 km/h
the raise/lower switch in the up direction for
(12 mph), indicator (4) will extinguish as the
one second. Indicator (6) will extinguish.
system goes to the part-lowered height.
Indicator (5) will be lit and indicator (7) will Note: When Crawl is cancelled, the suspension
continue to flash. will rise to On-road height if the vehicle speed is
greater than 10 km/h (6 mph).
The vehicle must slow down to 8 km/h (5 mph)
within one minute, to preveent Access height Selecting Access height directly from Off-road
cancellation. Indicators (5) and (7) will be lit. height
When Access height is reached, indicator (7) When the suspension is at Off-road height,
will extinguish. press switch (1) down, then press it again
Access height may be selected up to before indicator (7) goes out.
40 seconds after the starter switch is turned The system will remember to return the
off, provided that the driver’s door has not been suspension to Off-road height automatically if
opened within this time. the vehicle is driven above 10 km/h (6 mph).

187
L

Air Suspension
Automatic height change warnings Door open override
If a door is opened during a height change while
the vehicle is at rest, the height change will be
restricted.
3
2
4
1 3

H6202G 7
When the suspension is at Off-road height,
Access or Crawl, the suspension height will
change automatically when vehicle speed H6203G 7
exceeds predetermined levels. The indicator for the target height (3, 4 or 5) will
When the suspension is at Off-road height or remain lit and the raising indicator (2) or the
Crawl, it warns the driver that the vehicle is lowering indicator (7) will flash.
approaching a speed threshold. A chime will The height change will resume if all of the doors
sound, a message will be displayed on the are closed within 90 seconds.
message center and the On-road indicator (4)
If the doors are not closed within this time, the
and either (2) or (7) will flash.
raising indicator (2) or the lowering indicator
The Off-road height speed warning is shown (7) will extinguish and the indicators showing
above. If the vehicle slows down, the warning the heights above and below the current
will disappear. position will be illuminated.
Selecting a new height using the raise/lower
switch (1), or driving off will reset the system.

188
R

Air Suspension
Extended mode Additional lift whilst in Extended mode
If the vehicle is grounded and traction control is When Extended mode is invoked and the
induced, the system raises the vehicle clear of automatic lifting of the vehicle has been
the obstruction. Extended mode is activated completed, the driver can request an additional
automatically and cannot be selected manually. lift of the vehicle. This can be particularly useful
when Extended mode has been invoked on soft
surfaces.
To request additional lifting, wait for the raising
3 indicator (2) to extinguish then press and hold
the switch (1) in the up direction for 3 seconds
4 whilst ALSO pressing the brake pedal. A chime
1 will sound to confirm that the request has been
5 accepted. The raising indicator (2) will be
illuminated while the vehicle is being lifted.
To exit Extended mode, briefly press either the
raise or lower switch. Alternatively, the vehicle
will automatically lower if driven at a speed
greater than 5 km/h (3 mph) for 30 seconds.
H6204G
Suspension freeze
When Extended mode is activated, indicator (3) If the system is attempting to change the
will flash. A message will be displayed on the suspension height and it detects that the
message center. suspension is prevented from moving, the
To exit Extended mode, either press the system will freeze all movements.
raise/lower switch (1) briefly up or down, or This can be caused by attempting to lower the
drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 5 km/h vehicle onto an obstacle or attempting to lift the
(3 mph) for 30 seconds. vehicle against an obstruction.
The indicators operate in the same way as
described in Extended mode and the same
message will be displayed on the message
center. As in Extended mode, to exit this freeze
state, either press the switch (1) up or down, or
drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 20
km/h (12 mph).

189
L

Air Suspension
Remote operation After programming, to change the suspension
height via the remote control, remove the
WARNING starter key, turn on the hazard warning lamps
The remote control will operate effectively and close all doors. Remote operation is not
from inside the vehicle. It is therefore possible unless this is done.
important to keep it out of reach of children at
To raise the vehicle, press and hold the Land
all times.
Rover button (3) and Lock button (1).
When operating the remote control from
To lower the vehicle, press and hold the Land
inside the passenger compartment, ensure
Rover button (3) and Unlock button (2).
that the underside of the vehicle has been
checked for obstructions before lowering, and If any button is released during the raising or
that a responsible adult has been posted lowering of the suspension, all movement of
outside the vehicle to supervise the lowering the suspension will stop. It will restart once the
process. buttons are pressed again.
Care should be taken with all suspension The height will initially change slowly but, after
height changes when a trailer is attached to three seconds, the speed will increase. While
the vehicle. the height is changing, a indicator on the
raise/lower switch will be lit according to the
direction of movement.
If the starting height is above or below On-road
height, movement will stop when On-road
height is reached. Further movement can be
achieved by releasing the buttons and pressing
them again.
Normal height control will resume when the
1 vehicle is driven away.
2 Note: Remote operation is disabled when the
vehicle is moving.
3
H6205G

The remote control is programmable to give a


range of functions. See REMOTE CONTROL
PROGRAMMING, 29. If the vehicle’s remote
control has been configured to operate the air
suspension, height may be controlled remotely
to assist in loading the vehicle or attaching a
trailer.

190
R

Dynamic Response
Dynamic Response

DYNAMIC RESPONSE

H6366G

Dynamic Response is a patented feature unique Warning lamp


to Land Rover. The system is designed to The warning lamp illuminates
eliminate vehicle body roll at low cornering RED when the starter switch is
speeds and reduce body roll at higher cornering turned to position II. After two
speeds, while maintaining a soft, car-like, seconds, the RED illumination changes to
suspension for straight line travelling. On AMBER and, after a further two seconds, the
uneven surfaces and rough tracks, the Dynamic lamp extinguishes. This process is a system
Response system will adjust the suspension check that takes place every time the vehicle is
according to the vehicle speed and roughness used. Provided the Dynamic Response system
of the surface to provide improved passenger and Air Suspension system are operating
comfort. correctly, illumination will not occur at any
At very low speeds the roll bars are effectively other time.
decoupled, giving significant benefits in Caution: If the warning lamp illuminates RED
off-road axle articulation and improved traction. a system fault has occurred that may result in
The system is entirely automatic in operation serious damage to vehicle components. Stop
and cannot be influenced by the driver in any the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon
way. However, the functionality of the Dynamic as safety permits. Seek qualified assistance
Response warning lamp in the instrument panel immediately.
is very important and drivers should be aware
of the following:

191
L

Dynamic Response
If illumination occurs while driving, a fault with
the system is indicated, as follows:
• If the lamp shows RED (a flashing red
lamp, which changes to constant
illumination after two minutes, and is
accompanied by a warning chime):
This indicates a system fault that may
result in serious damage to vehicle
components and reduced Dynamic
Response performance. You must stop the
vehicle as soon as safety permits and
switch off the engine. DO NOT CONTINUE
DRIVING! Seek qualified assistance
immediately
• If the lamp shows AMBER (constant
illumination):
This indicates a system fault that will result
in reduced Dynamic Response
performance, but will not leave the vehicle
in a dangerous condition. You may
continue driving, but reduce speed, take
additional care, and consult a Land Rover
Dealer at the earliest opportunity.

192
R

Terrain Response
Terrain Response

TERRAIN RESPONSE This interface allows the driver to tell the vehicle
TM
The Terrain Response system is permanently what sort of terrain is to be driven over. Based
active, continuously providing benefits in on the selected special program, the system
traction and driveability. These can be further optimises the vehicle set-up for the prevailing
enhanced for specific on and off-road driving conditions, providing the optimum in traction,
conditions by the selection of special driveability and vehicle composure.
programs, using one simple driver interface. The Terrain Response special programs
automatically bring in changes in vehicle drive
and suspension systems that have until now
been only individually and manually
controllable by the driver.
AUTO

The suspension and drive systems comprising


Terrain Response are:
1 2
ABC
3
DEF

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

• Engine management
• Gearbox management
• Intelligent differential control
• Dynamic stability, traction control and HDC
systems
• Air suspension
The system will provide a variable throttle
response, ranging from very cautious for
slippery conditions (where a large pedal
movement has only a small effect on engine
power) to very responsive (e.g. for sand, where
engine power is allowed to rise more quickly).
In addition, Terrain Response offers control of
systems that have previously not been
manually controllable.
Terrain Response is designed to benefit the
driver, regardless of the level of off-road driving
experience. The enhanced traction control
system, with the control of many system
H6207L parameters through one simple driver input,
To raise the rotary control, press down on it coupled with specific advice from the message
lightly and release. To lower the rotary control, center, will aid drivers with limited off-road
press down until it clicks. Rotate the control to experience. Additionally, the system can
select the appropriate special program. back-up the skills of experienced drivers, who
will also benefit from the wider performance
envelope available through the special
programs.

193
L

Terrain Response
Note: Since each Terrain Response special In addition to the electronically controlled
program uses the optimum settings of each center differential, fitted to the vehicle as
drive component - throttle response, standard, Terrain Response may also be
suspension, transmission, etc. - relative to the optionally equipped with an electronically
terrain being driven over, it follows that controlled rear differential. The amount of slip
changing from one special program to another allowed in the electronically controlled
brings in a different set of criteria. differentials will be optimised continuously,
This means that, for instance, the engine revs both from the point of view of traction and
produced by the current throttle position might vehicle stability.
increase or decrease slightly in the new Depending on the Terrain Response program
program, or the suspension could change selected, the control of the differentials will vary
height. The changes are not dramatic, but are to provide the optimum settings.
noticeable. Note: Special programs should be engaged
To obtain the maximum benefits from the pro-actively - before starting to drive in
system, it is suggested that you first try it out in particular conditions. They are not intended as
circumstances where any distraction will not a means of extracting a vehicle that has been
affect other road users. driven into difficulties.
Using Terrain Response The system has been designed to instil
confidence regarding choice of special
When the vehicle is started, the system will
program, despite the fact that conditions
normally start in its General program. Using the
associated with each program are distinctly
correct special program, will provide benefits in
different. However, the vehicle will be very
how the vehicle can be driven over different
capable, even when no special program is
surfaces or terrains. It is recommended that a
selected, as some sub-systems will re-act to
special program be engaged, whenever driving
the conditions where possible. In case of any
conditions could become difficult.
uncertainties about the most appropriate
Depending on the terrain, it may be beneficial special program selection, it will be best to
for the transmission to change gear under leave the system in Terrain Response General
different speed and load conditions. Each program until terrain conditions become more
special program will provide the most distinct and a program choice can be made with
appropriate gear-shift points for the terrain, more confidence.
including the most appropriate gear to set off in
The system is of particular use when driving
(i.e., second, HIGH range, or third, LOW range,
off-road, but, even here, it should be used
in Grass-Gravel-Snow or first, low range, when
pro-actively and not be used as a means of
in Rock Crawl).
retrieving control.
If a Terrain Response special program has been
selected, then the transmission can be left in D.
If descending a slippery slope, CommandShift
1 or 2 should be considered.

194
R

Terrain Response
WARNING Whether the HDC or ride height options are
being brought in automatically by the system,
When towing, the automatic vehicle height
or manually by the driver, the changes of state
rise associated with using the system in low
will be confirmed through the main message
range will be automatically prevented by the
center and by the individual system information
system. This will be indicated by a warning in
indicators. Use of the system in the special
the main message center. However, this
programs, particularly in low range, may
function relies on the fitting of a Land Rover
prompt some driving advice and warnings as
approved towing electrical socket. Failure to
well as additional information to be displayed
fit a Land Rover approved towing electrical
on the main message center.
socket or to follow these guidelines may lead
to the vehicle being raised to off-road height Note: Transmission gear selection can be
even with a trailer attached. overridden by using the CommandShift
function on the gearbox to lock the vehicle in a
particular gear.
Driver over-ride options
All systems will be set to optimum parameters
for the terrain conditions reflected in the choice
of control program. Two of the systems
controlled by Terrain Response:
• Air Suspension
• Hill Descent Control
may also be operated independently by the
driver.
In some special programs, the Terrain
Response system will switch on HDC and in low
range the system will automatically move the
suspension to off-road height.

WARNING
This height increase will start regardless of
whether the vehicle is moving or not.

Both the HDC and suspension height automatic


selections can be cancelled by the driver at any
time. Conversely, if HDC or a specific
suspension height has not been automatically
selected by the system, the driver can always
choose to operate it as normal at any time.

195
L

Terrain Response
Terrain Response operation

H6209G

A rotary knob just behind the gear lever is


rotated to select the required special program.
When the selector reaches either end of the
selection range, it can be turned further, but
H6211G
doing so has no effect.
In addition to the Terrain Response General If the Mud-Ruts, Sand or Rock Crawl special
program, four special programs are available: programs are selected when the starter switch
• Grass/gravel/snow (also includes ice) is turned off, the system will remember for
approximately six hours which program was
• Mud/ruts selected, and return to that program once the
• Sand starter switch is turned back on.
• Rock Crawl The system indicates, via the message center,
When the starter switch is on, the indicators that the previously selected special program is
around the rotary knob are illuminated, with the still selected. After more than six hours, the
active program highlighted in amber. The system will automatically revert back to the
brightness of the indicator’s night illumination General program (Special programs off).
is controlled as part of the instrument’s
illumination control; the brightness of the
amber lighting is high or low depending on the
use of the vehicle’s headlamps.
If a Special Program is active, the Special
Program indicator will also be displayed on the
instrument pack main message center.

196
R

Terrain Response
Terrain Response General Grass-Gravel-Snow
When the Terrain Response Use this special program for
special programs are off, the surfaces where the underlying
system will be in its General base is fairly firm but a coating of
program. This will be indicated by a message in other material gives a tendency to slip. The
the main message center and program coating can be water, slime, grass, snow or
indicator illumination on the rotary knob. loose gravel, shale or pebbles, or even a thin
Vehicle systems will adapt to the prevailing coating of sand. This program should also be
terrain conditions and select control settings selected in icy conditions.
based on the conditions sensed. In this Special program the Terrain Response
This program setting is compatible with all on- systems will select settings to give the best
and off-road terrain conditions. Normal traction, handling and driveability for
conditions in which it is not necessary to select predominantly slippery conditions. Hill Descent
a special program include driving on surfaces Control (see HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC),
that closely match a solid road surface. Dry 182) will be engaged automatically in low
cobbles, Tarmac or even wooden planks are all range, but can be manually de-selected.
included in the scope which consists of hard In slippery conditions it is often beneficial to
supportive surfaces with no loose coating of start off in a higher gear than usual, for
water, dust or similar material. example, second gear in HIGH range or third
It is recommended that a special program be gear in LOW range. Upon selection of the
de-selected once the specific conditions for its Grass/Gravel/Snow program, a message will
use no longer prevail. This is done by turning appear in the main message center. This
the rotary knob back to the General program message will appear only once per ignition
position. cycle.
When a special program is de-selected, all For use of the vehicle with snow chains fitted,
vehicle systems will be returned to their normal see SNOW CHAINS, 240.
control settings. The one exception is HDC, Note: When in deep snow, if the vehicle is
which will remain active if it was manually struggling for forward traction or is stuck, then
selected previously. Also, as a precaution, the switching off Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
vehicle will change from raised to normal may be an advantage. If DSC is switched off,
suspension height only when moving. then it must be switched back on as soon as the
difficulty is overcome.

197
L

Terrain Response
Mud-Ruts Rock Crawl
Use this special program when Use this special program to cross
traversing ground that is not only wet or dry, solid, unyielding
muddy or deeply rutted but ground, such as clusters of
possibly soft and uneven to the point of boulders, which demands high levels of
demanding maximum ground clearance. This road-wheel displacement and careful vehicle
unevenness can also be brought about by control. This program would also be used for
sizeable wooden debris in the form of roots, crossing river beds strewn with large rock
brushwood, small logs, etc. features submerged below water.
This acts like the previous special program, Unlike the other special programs, Rock Crawl
except that it selects settings for the individual is only selectable in LOW range. If selection is
vehicle systems that optimise traction and attempted in HIGH range, the special program
driveability for muddy/rutted driving selection will NOT be accepted and the driver
conditions, with driver over-ride options as will be prompted to select LOW range. This
before. The Mud-Ruts special program is special program will utilise system control
available in HIGH and LOW range, but LOW settings to optimise the vehicle suspension and
range is recommended. traction control system for the conditions,
It is anticipated that this program will usually be which are likely to require extreme suspension
used in LOW range. If not, the driver will be articulation and good low-speed control.
prompted to consider selecting LOW range. If When a special program requires increased air
the Mud-Ruts special program and LOW range suspension height, the system will
are selected together, the vehicle’s suspension automatically select it, unless it suspects that a
height will be raised automatically. trailer is attached because an electric load is
seen on the trailer socket.
Sand
A message will be displayed on the message
Use this special program to drive
center.
on soft and predominantly dry,
yielding sandy ground, such as dry Caution: Selection of a wholly inappropriate
beaches, dunes and sand deserts. Also special program for the prevailing terrain
consider using this program for deep gravel. conditions will not endanger the driver or
immediately damage the vehicle. However, if
The Sand special program uses the control
continued, such an action will impair the
settings and software logic best suited to
vehicle’s response to those conditions and
driving on sand, with the driver-override option
will reduce the durability of the suspension
as before.
and drive systems.
In instances where the sand is damp or wet and
soggy, the conditions are better addressed by
the use of mud/ruts special program.
Where the sand is extremely soft and dry and of
a depth that allows the wheels to sink well into
it, there may be additional benefit in switching
off the Dynamic Stability Control. See
Deactivating DSC operation, 180.

198
R

Terrain Response
Inappropriate special program selection MESSAGES
If attempting to select an inappropriate special Messages relating to the Terrain Response
program - such as choosing Rock Crawl while system are displayed on the instrument pack
in HIGH range - the symbol of that program will main message center.
flash amber, an audio warning will sound, and
For an explanation of those messages, see
the instrument pack message center will advise
MAIN MESSAGE CENTER, 79.
that the chosen special program is unavailable
and will suggest corrective action to be taken.
If, after 60 seconds, the requirements have not
been met, the warnings will cease and the
message center will show which program
remains active.
Should the system become partly inoperable
for any reason, it may not be possible to select
certain special programs and a warning will be
given when selection of an affected program is
attempted. If the system should become totally
inoperable, all of the control program symbols
will be switched off and the message center will
display a text message.
The air suspension system provides an
automatic levelling function (see AIR
SUSPENSION, 185). In circumstances where
the system is used in LOW range, it is most
likely that mobility and vehicle composure
would benefit from increased ground clearance.

199
L

Towing
Towing

H6213G

TOWING Levelling the combination


The torque ranges of Land Rover engines allow To ensure optimum stability, it is essential that
maximum-weight loads to be pulled smoothly the trailer adopts a level aspect. In other words,
from standstill and reduce gear changing on the trailer must be level with the ground, with
hills or rough terrain. the towing hitch and trailer drawbar set at the
same height (note the illustration above).
WARNING This is particularly important when towing twin
To preserve the vehicle’s handling and axle trailers!
stability, only fit towing accessories that have
been designed and approved by Land Rover. • The trailer should be level with the ground
when loaded.
DO NOT use lashing eyes or vehicle recovery
towing eyes to tow a trailer. Use of the towing • The height of the drawbar hitch point
eyes for purposes other than their designed should be set so that the trailer is level
intention could result in damage or injury. when connected to the loaded vehicle.
Points to remember:
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure that the
• When calculating the laden weight of the
towing vehicle and trailer are loaded and level
trailer, remember to include the weight of
so that the combination is stable when in
the trailer PLUS the load.
motion. When preparing your vehicle for
towing, pay attention to any instructions • The recommended trailer tongue weight
provided by the trailer manufacturer as well as plus the combined weight of the vehicle's
to the information that follows. load-carrying area and rear seat
passengers must never exceed the
Caution: An equalising or other form of weight
specified maximum rear axle load. See
distributing hitch should NOT be used with
TOWING WEIGHTS, 297.
your vehicle.
• Before levelling the combination, ensure
that:
All doors are closed.
The engine is running.
On-road ride height is selected.
This ensures that the towing hitch is at the
correct height.

200
R

Towing
• Where the load can be divided between Vehicle weights
trailer and tow vehicle, loading more When loading a vehicle to its maximum weight
weight into the vehicle will generally (gross vehicle weight), ensure that axle loading
improve the stability of the combination. does not exceed the permitted maximum
• Towing regulations vary from country to values. It is the driver’s responsibility to limit
country. Always ensure national the vehicle load in such a way that neither the
regulations governing towing weights and maximum axle loads nor the gross vehicle
speed limits are observed (refer to the weight are exceeded.
relevant national motoring organisation for
information). The vehicle’s maximum
WARNING
permissible towed weight refers to its In the interest of safety, the gross vehicle
design limitations and NOT to any specific weight, maximum rear axle weight,
territorial restriction. See TOWING maximum trailer weight and tow hitch load
WEIGHTS, 297. (tongue weight) must not be exceeded.
Exceeding allowable vehicle and axle loads
Note: When towing do not exceed 100 km/h will increase the risk of tire and suspension
(60 mph), or 80 km/h (50 mph) when the failure, increase vehicle brake stopping
compact/temporary spare wheel is in use. See distance and adversely affect vehicle
WHEELS AND TIRES, 296. handling and stability. This may result in a
Gear range selection crash or vehicle roll-over.
To avoid overheating the gearbox, it is not
advisable to tow heavy trailer loads at speeds of Tongue weight
less than 32 km/h (21 mph) using the transfer
gearbox in HIGH range. Select LOW range WARNING
instead. The tongue weight plus the combined weight
of the vehicle's load carrying area and rear
seat passengers must never exceed the
specified maximum rear axle load. See
TOWING WEIGHTS, 297.

Trailer socket
The trailer socket is located alongside the rear
towing eye and behind the rear bumper cover.
See Removing the rear panel, 210.
The vehicle’s electrical system is configured to
support all towing requirements and the
electrical socket fitted will comply with legal
requirements for the specific territory.
Caution: PDC is automatically switched off at
the rear when a trailer is attached to the
vehicle.

201
L

Towing

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS


Tongue weight If the vehicle is loaded to the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), the tongue weight
is limited to 150 kg (330 lb.). If a greater tongue weight is necessary (up to
250 kg (550 lb.) maximum), vehicle load should be reduced to ensure the
GVW and rear axle weights are not exceeded. See VEHICLE WEIGHTS, 297,
for further information.
Breakaway cable A breakaway cable or secondary coupling MUST be attached. If the
or secondary trailer/caravan is fitted with brakes, it is usual for an attached breakaway cable
coupling to operate the brakes in the event of the coupling becoming detached. See
your trailer manufacturer’s literature. If your trailer does not have a breakaway
cable, a secondary coupling must be attached. Use a suitable point on the
towing bracket to securely attach the coupling. It is not advisable to loop
cables or couplings around the neck of the tow ball as they could slide off.

Caution: For all of the towing conditions


described, it is important that the following
points are observed:
• All loads in the vehicle should be
distributed as far forward as possible.
• The maximum Gross Vehicle Weight must
not be exceeded. See VEHICLE WEIGHTS,
297.
• The maximum individual axle weights
must not be exceeded. See VEHICLE
WEIGHTS, 297.
• Total trailer weight and tongue load can
be measured with platform scales found
at highway weighing stations, building
supply companies, etc.

202
R

Towing
TRAILER HITCH TOW BAR
The optional trailer hitch receiver is rated as a Your vehicle is fitted with a towing housing
Class lll. When selecting a drawbar for the which will accept a detachable tow bar.
receiver, the following dimensions must be
adhered to:
A. The maximum recommended drawbar
length is 229 mm (9 in.).
B. The maximum recommended drawbar rise
height is 70 mm (2.75 in.).
C. The minimum recommended drawbar rise
height is 19 mm (0.75 in.).

A 9"

H6216N

C
3"
4

H6234N

Note: A drawbar of 228 mm (9 in.) length with


a rise of 38 mm (1.5 in.) is recommended for
use with the Land Rover approved towing hitch.
Consult your Dealer for the most up-to-date
information.

203
L

Towing
Detachable tow bar stowage

H6219N

The tow bar is stowed under an access hatch in


the rear loadspace floor.

204
R

Towing
Detachable tow bar

1 4

2 3

H6221N

Fitting the detachable tow bar 2. The tow bar can only be installed when the
green locking lever is in the unlocked
WARNING position.
The tow bar is heavy. Care must be taken
3. Insert the tow bar into the mounting and
when handling it.
push firmly upwards until the tow bar locks
into position.
1. Remove the protective cover from the tow
bar mounting. 4. The red marker should be completely
covered by the green locking lever.
Note: The protective cover should be
stowed in the tow bar stowage area, while 5. A lock is provided to prevent theft from the
the tow bar is installed. vehicle. Turn the key counter-clockwise to
lock the tow bar. Remove the key and store
in a safe place.

205
L

Towing
WARNING
When handling the tow bar, hold the bottom of
the component. Locking into position occurs
automatically and causes the locking lever to
rotate under spring pressure.

The tow bar must be locked in position before


towing. The tow bar can only be locked if it is
installed correctly into the tow bar mounting.
It is advised that the tow bar be removed and
stored within the vehicle stowage when not in
use.

206
R

Towing
Removing the tow bar

2
3

H6223N

WARNING 3. Carefully lower the tow bar and place it in


its stowage area and fully secure it.
The tow bar is heavy. Care must be taken
when handling it. 4. Replace the protective towing cover in the
tow bar mounting. Press the bottom of the
1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to cover to fix it in position.
unlock the tow bar.
2. To remove the tow bar, pull the handle
outwards and rotate the handle counter
clockwise until a click is heard. The marker
on the handle should show red.

207
L

Towing Eyes
Towing Eyes

TOWING EYES Removing the front panel


Rotate each of the fasteners through a quarter
WARNING turn with a coin (or something similar) to
The towing eyes at the front and rear of the loosen the panel. Rotate the lower edge
vehicle are designed for on-road vehicle forwards then pull the panel to release the four
recovery purposes only and must NOT be used top edge hooks from their locating holes.
to tow a trailer or caravan.
Use of the towing eyes for purposes other than
their designed intention could result in
damage or injury.

Front towing eye


A front towing eye, set behind a removable
panel in the lower front bumper, is provided at
the front of the vehicle for on-road recovery.

H6226G

208
R

Towing Eyes
Refitting the front panel Rear towing eye
Offer up the panel to the bumper and ensure The towing eye provided at the rear of the
that the four hooks on the top edge engage with vehicle can be used for towing your vehicle or
the holes in the bumper. Rotate the lower edge towing another vehicle in recovery situations.
backwards ensuring that the lower edge is
located in the bumper channel.
Tighten the fasteners by turning each clockwise
through a quarter turn.

H6231G

H6227G

209
L

Towing Eyes
Removing the rear panel Refitting the rear panel

H6230G

Offer up the cover and ensure that the four


hooks on the top edge engage with the holes in
the bumper.
Tighten the fasteners by turning each clockwise
through a quarter turn.

H6229G

Rotate each of the fasteners through a quarter


turn with a coin (or something similar) to
release the lower edge. The cover can then be
rotated to release the hooks at the top.

210
R

Towing the Vehicle


TOWING FOR RECOVERY Caution: If the following conditions are met,
Towing the Vehicle

the vehicle can be towed for a maximum


Towing the vehicle on four wheels distance of only 50 km (30 miles) at a
WARNING maximum speed of 50 km/h (30 mph). If the
stated distance or speed is exceeded,
ALWAYS adhere to the following procedure
damage to the transmission may occur.
when towing the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in unintended vehicle movement Note: Your vehicle has permanent four-wheel
or unanticipated vehicle conditions. drive and is fitted with a steering lock. The
following procedure must be carried out
When preparing to tow the vehicle, ensure
carefully to prevent damage to the vehicle.
that the parkbrake is applied, then select
neutral on the transmission. Leaving the starter switch in position I or II for
extended periods may drain the vehicle battery.
DO NOT remove the starter key or turn the
starter switch to position 0 while the vehicle 1. Secure the towing attachment from the
is in motion, as this will lock the steering. recovery vehicle to the front towing eye.
See TOWING EYES, 208.
Without the engine running, the brake servo
and power steering pump cannot provide 2. With the parkbrake applied, insert the
assistance; greater effort will therefore be starter key and turn it to position II.
required to operate the brake pedal and turn 3. Apply the foot brake and place the auto
the steering wheel. Longer stopping selector lever into N (Neutral).
distances will also be experienced. 4. Turn the starter switch to position l. Do not
turn the starter switch to position 0.
Caution: Under no circumstances can the
vehicle be towed with only two wheels in 5. If required, the starter switch may be
contact with the ground. turned to position II, to operate the brake
lamps and direction/turn indicators.
6. Release the parkbrake before towing the
vehicle.
Caution: The vehicle must not be towed under
the following circumstances:
• If the gearbox cannot be set in neutral.
• If the rear electronic differential has
failed in the locked position.

211
L

Towing the Vehicle


After towing on four wheels
After towing, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parkbrake.
2. Turn the starter switch to position ll and
apply the foot brake.
3. Place the auto selector lever into P (Park).
4. Turn the starter switch to position 0.
5. Remove the towing attachment and replace
the panel in the front bumper.
Recovery on a trailer
Recovery by trailer is the recommended
method. Most vehicle recovery specialists will
load the vehicle onto a trailer, or have a
combined wheel lift and towing dolly
arrangement to lift it clear of the ground.
Lashing eyes
Pairs of lashing eyes for insertion of
appropriate hooks are fixed to the underside of
the vehicle. DO NOT secure lashing hooks to
any other part of the vehicle.
H6578G
Note: The front and rear lashing eyes are for Front lashing eyes
lashing only and must NOT be used for towing.
Caution: Once the vehicle is loaded onto the
trailer and if the vehicle electronics are
operational, the Air Suspension must be set
to Access height. This should be done
BEFORE securing the vehicle to the trailer.
See AIR SUSPENSION, 185.

H6579G

Rear lashing eyes

212
R

Load Carrying
Load Carrying

ROOF RACKS
A range of roof rack systems are available as
Land Rover approved accessories. For further
information about roof rack systems approved
for use with the vehicle and advice as to which
system would suit your requirements best,
please consult your Land Rover Dealer.
Always observe the following precautions:
• Only fit roof racks that have been designed
for the vehicle. If in doubt, consult your
Land Rover Dealer.
• All loads should be evenly distributed, side
to side, with any weight bias towards the
front of the roof rack system.
• Ensure all loads are secured within the
periphery of the roof rack system.

WARNING
The MAXIMUM load for approved roof rack
systems is 75 kg (165 lb.). This weight
includes the mass of the roof rack system.
A loaded roof rack can reduce the stability of
the vehicle, particularly when cornering and
encountering cross winds.
Check to ensure that the roof rack and load are
secure after 50 km (30 miles) of any journey.
Driving off-road with a loaded roof rack is not
recommended. If it is necessary to stow
luggage on the roof rack while driving
off-road, all loads must be removed before
traversing side slopes.

213
L

Front Lighting Systems


Front Lighting Systems

FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEMS WARNING


There are three types of headlamp systems: Bi-Xenon lamp units operate at a high
• Halogen high/low beam main lamps with temperature. If they have recently been in
fill-in high beam halogen lamps alongside. use, allow sufficient time for them to cool
down before touching them.
• Bi-xenon high/low beam main lamps with
fill-in high beam halogen lamp alongside. Used Xenon lamp units contain Mercury,
which is hazardous and can be injurious to
• An Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS).
health.
Bi-Xenon headlamps A very high voltage is required to ignite the
Bi-Xenon headlamps use a Xenon bulb for both gas and metal vapour used to power Xenon
high beam and low beam whilst a halogen bulb lamps. Contact with this voltage could cause
is used for high beam fill-in. A shutter, operated very serious injury.
by a solenoid, changes the direction of the Replacement or maintenance of Xenon lamps
Xenon lamp beam to give either low or high should be carried out only by qualified
beam. personnel.
The operational life of a Bi-Xenon lamp is
significantly longer than that of a conventional
or halogen bulb.

A B

100 100

50 50

H6645L

A. Bi-Xenon lamps, with improved visibility. B. Halogen lamps.

214
R

Front Lighting Systems


Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) The AFS advantage
AFS is a new lighting system designed to give
improved visibility. A
The headlamp units can swivel left or right, to
improve light spread on bends in the road and
they operate throughout the vehicle speed
range. They also react in the vertical plane to
the vehicle’s braking or acceleration to
maximise headlamp performance.
These units operate when the engine is running
and the lamps master switch is in position 3.
They will also operate with the lamps master
switch in position 4 (Auto), if the ambient light
has fallen below a preset level.
The system takes inputs from the vehicle’s road
speed and steering angle to determine the
amount of horizontal swivel. The amount of
swivel is highest at low manoeuvering speeds B
and movement reduces as speed increases.
If reverse gear is selected, the lamps return to
the central position and the unit’s swivelling
capability is disabled.
When the engine is started, the headlamps can
be seen to swivel as they go through a
self-calibration for a few seconds.

H6235L

A. Shows the light spread of a vehicle not


fitted with AFS.
B. Shows the light spread of a vehicle fitted
with AFS

215
L

Maintenance
Maintenance

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE OWNER MAINTENANCE


Regular systematic maintenance is essential to In addition to the routine maintenance, a
ensure the continued reliability and efficiency of number of simple checks must be carried out
your vehicle. more frequently. Advice is given on the pages
Maintenance is the owner's responsibility and that follow.
you must ensure that owner maintenance Any significant or sudden drop in fluid levels,
operations, oil services, inspections and brake or uneven tire wear, should be reported to a
fluid and coolant changes are carried out when Land Rover Dealer without delay.
required and according to the manufacturer's
Daily checks
recommendations.
• Operation of lamps, horn, direction/turn
The routine maintenance requirements for the
indicators, wipers, washers and warning
vehicle are shown in the Passport to Service
indicators.
book. Most of this necessary workshop
maintenance requires specialised knowledge • Operation of seat belts and brakes.
and equipment, and should preferably be • Look for fluid deposits underneath the
entrusted to a Land Rover Dealer. vehicle that might indicate a leak.
Passport to Service Weekly checks
The Passport to Service book includes a • Brake fluid level.
Service Record section, which enables a record
• Power steering fluid level.
to be kept of all the servicing and inspections
that are carried out on the vehicle. This section • Windshield washer fluid level.
of the book also provides a facility for the Land • Tire pressures and condition.
Rover Dealer to record brake fluid changes. • Operate air conditioning.
Ensure your Land Rover Dealer signs and • Engine oil level.
stamps the book after each service and
Note: The engine oil level should be checked
inspection.
more frequently if the vehicle is driven for
prolonged periods at high speeds.
Caution: Your vehicle warranty may be
invalidated if damage is caused by use of
improper engine oil. Low quality or obsolete
oils do NOT provide the protection required by
modern, high performance engines. Failure
to use an oil that meets the required
specification could cause excessive engine
wear, a build up of sludge and deposits, and
increase pollution. It could also lead to
engine failure.
All fluid specifications and capacities are shown
in LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 293.

216
R

Maintenance
Driving in arduous conditions WARNING
When a vehicle is operated in extremely • NEVER leave the engine running in an
arduous conditions, more frequent attention unventilated area - exhaust gases are
must be paid to servicing requirements. poisonous and extremely dangerous.
For example: if your vehicle experiences deep • DO NOT work beneath the vehicle with the
wading conditions, even DAILY servicing could wheel changing jack as the only means of
be necessary to ensure the continued safe and support.
reliable operation of the vehicle.
• Ensure sparks and open flames are kept
Arduous driving conditions include: away from the engine compartment.
• Driving in dusty and/or sandy conditions. • Wear protective clothing, including,
• Driving on rough and/or muddy roads where practicable, gloves made from an
and/or wading. impervious material.
• Driving in extremely hot conditions. • Remove metal wrist bands and jewellery
• Towing a trailer or driving in mountainous before working in the engine
conditions. compartment.
Contact a Land Rover Dealer for advice. • DO NOT allow tools or metal parts of the
vehicle to make contact with the battery
Emission control equipment leads or terminals.
The vehicle is fitted with various items of Under no circumstances should any part of
emission and evaporative control equipment the fuel system be dismantled or replaced by
designed to meet specific territorial anyone other than a suitably qualified motor
requirements. You should be aware that vehicle technician. Failure to comply with this
unauthorised replacement, modification or instruction may result in fuel spillage with a
tampering with this equipment by an owner or consequent serious risk of fire.
repair shop may be unlawful and subject to
legal penalties.
In addition, engine settings must not be
tampered with. These have been established to
ensure that the vehicle complies with stringent
exhaust emission regulations. Incorrect engine
settings may adversely affect exhaust
emissions, engine performance and fuel
consumption, as well as causing high
temperatures, which will result in damage to
the catalytic converter and the vehicle.

217
L

Maintenance
SAFETY IN THE GARAGE Poisonous fluids
Fluids used in motor vehicles are poisonous
WARNING and should not be consumed or brought into
When the engine is hot, the cooling fans may contact with the skin. These include; battery
continue to operate, or COMMENCE operating acid, antifreeze, brake and power steering fluid,
after the engine is switched off and continue gasoline, engine oil and windshield washer
operating for up to 10 minutes. Keep clear of additives.
all fans when working in the engine bay, and
For your own safety, ALWAYS read and obey all
ensure that you observe the following
instructions printed on labels and containers.
precautions:
• Keep your hands, hair, tools and clothing Used engine oil
away from drive belts, pulleys and Prolonged contact with engine oil may cause
cooling fans. serious skin disorders, including dermatitis and
• If the vehicle has been driven recently, cancer of the skin. ALWAYS wash thoroughly
DO NOT touch exhaust and cooling after contact.
system components until the engine has It is illegal to pollute drains, water
cooled. courses or soil. Use authorised waste
• DO NOT TOUCH electrical leads or disposal sites to dispose of used oil
components while the engine is running, and toxic chemicals.
or with the starter switch turned on. ROAD TESTING DYNAMOMETERS
• NEVER leave the engine running in an (rolling roads)
unventilated area - exhaust gases are
Because the vehicle is equipped with anti-lock
poisonous and extremely dangerous.
brakes and permanent four-wheel drive, it is
essential that any dynamometer testing is
carried out ONLY by a qualified person familiar
with the dynamometer testing and safety
procedures and ONLY on a four-wheel drive
dynamometer. Contact your Land Rover Dealer
for further information.

218
R

Hood Opening
Hood Opening

HOOD OPENING Closing the hood


Lower the hood until the safety catch engages,
then using both hands, press the hood down
until the catches click.

WARNING
DO NOT drive with the hood retained by the
safety catch alone.

After closing the hood, check that the lock is


fully engaged by attempting to lift the front edge
of the hood. This should be free from all
movement.

H6246L

1. From inside the vehicle on the left hand


side, pull the hood release handle (see
upper inset).
2. Lift the hood safety catch lever located
below the center point of the words LAND
ROVER (lower inset). Whilst holding the
lever raise the hood.

219
L

Under-hood Covers
Under-hood Covers

UNDER-HOOD COVERS Fitting

Removal

H6249G

H6248G Caution: Ensure that no pipes, cables, or


other items have been trapped between the
Press the two forward tabs and lift the front
cover and casing.
edge of the cover. Once the front edge of the
cover is free, slide the cover towards the front Slide the rear edge of the cover under the
of the vehicle. rubber trim fitted to the scuttle panel. Once the
front edge of the cover is aligned with the front
edge of the casing, press the front of the cover
down until the two tabs click into place.

220
R

Engine Compartment
Engine Compartment

V8 ENGINE

2 1 3

4 5 6

H6373L

1. Engine oil filler cap. WARNING


2. Engine oil dipstick. While working in the engine compartment,
3. Brake fluid reservoir. ALWAYS observe the safety precautions
4. Power steering reservoir. listed under SAFETY IN THE GARAGE, 218.
5. Cooling system reservoir.
6. Washer reservoir.
7. Dynamic Response reservoir.

221
L

Engine Compartment
V8 SUPERCHARGED ENGINE

2 1 3

4 5 6

H6252L

1. Engine oil filler cap. WARNING


2. Engine oil dipstick. While working in the engine compartment,
3. Brake fluid reservoir. ALWAYS observe the safety precautions
4. Power steering reservoir. listed under SAFETY IN THE GARAGE, 218.
5. Cooling system reservoir.
6. Washer reservoir.
7. Dynamic Response reservoir.

222
R

Engine Oil
Engine Oil

CHECK AND TOP-UP Checking oil level


The oil consumption of your engine is 1. Withdraw the dipstick and wipe the blade
influenced by many factors. New engines reach clean with a lint free cloth.
the normal value only after 5000 km 2. Fully re-insert the dipstick and withdraw
(3000 miles). Under high loads your engine will again to check the level, which should
also consume more oil. NEVER be allowed to fall below the lower
Check the oil level weekly, when the engine is mark or hole on the dipstick.
COLD and with the vehicle resting on level 3. To top-up, unscrew the oil filler cap and
ground. add oil to maintain the level between the
Note: If it is necessary to check the oil level UPPER and LOWER marks or holes on the
when the engine is hot, switch off the engine dipstick.
and let the vehicle stand for five minutes to DO NOT OVERFILL! Clean up any oil
allow the oil to drain back into the sump. DO spillage incurred when topping-up.
NOT start the engine.
4. Check the oil level again after 5 minutes.
As a general guide, if the level on the dipstick:
• is nearer to the upper mark or hole than the
lower, add no oil.
• is nearer to the lower mark or hole than the
upper, add half a litre (one pint) of oil. MAX
• is below the lower mark or hole, add one
litre (two pints) of oil and re-check the level
MIN
after a further 5 minutes. H6372N

Oil specification Caution: Your vehicle warranty may be


It is essential to use an oil suitable for the invalidated if damage is caused by use of
climatic conditions in which the vehicle is to be improper engine oil. Low quality or obsolete
operated. Precise specifications are shown in oils DO NOT provide the protection required
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 293. If in doubt, by modern, high performance engines.
contact your Land Rover Dealer. Failure to use an oil that meets the required
specification could cause excessive engine
wear, a build up of sludge and deposits, and
increase pollution. It could also lead to
engine failure.

223
L

Cooling System
Cooling System

ENGINE COOLANT Coolant check and top-up

WARNING
NEVER remove the filler cap when the engine
is hot - escaping steam or scalding water
could cause serious personal injury.
Unscrew the filler cap slowly, allowing the
pressure to escape before removing
completely.
Avoid spilling antifreeze onto a hot engine - a
fire may result.

Caution: NEVER run the engine without


coolant.
Antifreeze will damage painted surfaces;
soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth
immediately and wash the area with a
mixture of car shampoo and water.
NEVER top-up with salt water. When
travelling in territories where the water
supply contains salt, always ensure you carry
a supply of fresh (rain or distilled) water. H6263G

The coolant level in the expansion tank should Top-up with a 50% mixture of antifreeze and
be checked at least weekly (more frequently in water (see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 293),
high mileage or arduous operating conditions). up to the upper level indicator mark located
Always check the level WHEN THE SYSTEM IS above the COLD FILL RANGE text on the side of
COLD. the expansion tank. This should be viewed from
If it is necessary to remove the filler cap before standing in front of the vehicle. Ignore any
the system has fully cooled, loosen the cap coolant visible in the top section of the tank.
slowly, allowing the air pressure to escape Ensure the cap is tightened fully after top-up is
gradually. completed by turning the cap until the ratchet
cap clicks.
If the level has fallen appreciably, suspect
leakage or overheating and arrange for your
Land Rover Dealer to examine the vehicle.

224
R

Cooling System
ANTIFREEZE
WARNING
Antifreeze is poisonous and can be fatal if
swallowed - keep containers sealed and out
of the reach of children. If accidental
consumption is suspected, seek medical
attention immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the skin or
eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water.

Antifreeze contains important corrosion


inhibitors. The antifreeze content of the coolant
must be maintained at 50% ± 5% all year round
(not just in cold conditions). To ensure the
anti-corrosion properties of the coolant are
retained, the antifreeze content should be
checked once a year and completely renewed
every ten years, regardless of distance
travelled. Failure to do so may cause corrosion
of the radiator and engine components.
The specific gravity of a 50% antifreeze solution
at 20°C (68°F) is 1.068 and protects against
frost down to -40°C (-40°F).
Coolant specification
Use ONLY a 50% mix of water and an approved
antifreeze. See LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
293.
In an emergency - and only if this type of
antifreeze is unavailable - top-up the cooling
system with clean water, but be aware of the
resultant reduction in frost protection. DO NOT
top-up or refill with conventional antifreeze
formulations. If in doubt consult a Land Rover
Dealer.

225
L

Brakes
Brakes

BRAKE FLUID Brake fluid check and top-up

WARNING
Brake fluid is highly toxic - keep containers
sealed and out of the reach of children. If
accidental consumption of fluid is suspected,
seek medical attention immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the skin or
eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water.
Take care not to spill the fluid onto a hot
engine - a fire may result.
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the fluid level
below the MIN mark.

Caution: Brake fluid will damage painted


surfaces; soak up any spillage with an H6264G
absorbent cloth immediately and wash the
area with a mixture of car shampoo and Wipe the filler cap clean before removing to
water. prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.

The fluid level may fall slightly during normal Disconnect the electrical lead.
use as a result of brake pad wear but should not Unscrew the cap (1/8 turn) and top-up the
be allowed to fall below the MIN mark. Any reservoir to the MAX mark using a specified
substantial drop in fluid indicates a leak in the brake fluid. See LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
system, in which case the vehicle must NOT be 293.
driven and you should contact your Land Rover Use only new fluid from an airtight container
Dealer. (old fluid from opened containers or fluid
previously bled from the system will have
WARNING
absorbed moisture, which will adversely affect
Contact your Land Rover Dealer immediately
performance, and must NOT be used). DO NOT
if brake pedal travel is unusually long or if
OVERFILL!
there is any appreciable drop in brake fluid
level. Replace the cap and reconnect the electrical
lead, ensuring the lead points to the center-line
With the vehicle on level ground, check the fluid of the vehicle.
level at least every week (more frequently in Brake fluid must be completely renewed every
high mileage or arduous operating conditions). two years regardless of distance travelled.
Check the level visually through the side of the
transparent reservoir without removing the
filler cap.

226
R

Power Steering
Power Steering

POWER STEERING FLUID Power steering fluid check and top-up


Check and top-up the fluid level ONLY with the
WARNING engine switched off and the system cold, and
Power steering fluid is highly toxic - keep ensure the steering wheel is not turned after
containers sealed and out of reach of stopping the engine.
children. If accidental consumption of fluid is
suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the skin or
eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water.
Do not spill the fluid onto a hot engine - a fire
may result.

Caution: Power steering fluid will damage


painted surfaces: Soak up any spillage with
an absorbent cloth immediately and wash the
area with a mixture of car shampoo and
water.
Any large or sudden drop in the fluid level must
be investigated by a Land Rover Dealer. H6265G
If it can be established that fluid loss is slow,
The level of fluid can be seen through the
then the reservoir may be topped-up to the
translucent body of the reservoir which has two
upper level mark to enable the vehicle to be
marks on it to indicate maximum and minimum
driven to the nearest Land Rover Dealer for
levels.
examination.
If necessary, add fluid to the reservoir until the
Caution: The engine must NOT be started if
level is between the upper and the lower marks.
the fluid level has dropped below the lower
DO NOT fill above the upper mark. See
mark - severe damage to the steering pump
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 293.
could result.

227
L

Dynamic Response
Dynamic Response

DYNAMIC RESPONSE FLUID Dynamic Response fluid check and top-up


Check and top-up the fluid level ONLY with the
WARNING engine switched off and the system cold.
Dynamic Response fluid is highly toxic - keep
containers sealed and out of reach of
children. If accidental consumption of fluid is
suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the skin or
eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water.
Do not spill the fluid onto a hot engine - a fire
may result.

Caution: Dynamic Response fluid will


damage painted surfaces: Soak up any
spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately
and wash the area with a mixture of car
shampoo and water.
Any large or sudden drop in the fluid level must
be investigated by a Land Rover Dealer. H6404G

If it can be established that fluid loss is slow, The level of fluid can be seen through the
then the reservoir may be topped-up to the translucent body of the reservoir which has two
upper level mark to enable the vehicle to be marks on it to indicate maximum and minimum
driven to the nearest Land Rover Dealer for levels.
examination. If more fluid is needed, first wipe the filler cap
Driving of the vehicle to repair should not be clean to prevent dirt from entering the
attempted if there is danger that the leaked fluid reservoir, then twist the cap a quarter turn
will come into contact with a hot surface such anti-clockwise and pull to remove. Add fluid to
as the exhaust. the reservoir until the level is between the upper
Caution: The engine must NOT be started if and the lower marks. DO NOT fill above the
the fluid level has dropped below the lower upper mark. See LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
mark - severe damage to the Dynamic 293.
Response pump could result. Caution: The Dynamic Response hydraulic
system is extremely sensitive to the ingress
of dirt and debris. The smallest amount can
cause the system to become unserviceable.
Care must be taken when removing and
refitting the filler cap after topping-up.

228
R

Washers
Washers

WINDSHIELD WASHER TOP-UP DO NOT use an antifreeze or vinegar/water


solution in the washer reservoir - antifreeze will
damage painted surfaces, while vinegar can
damage the windshield washer pump.
Body panels may suffer discoloration as a
result of windshield wash spillage. Take care to
avoid spillage, particularly if an undiluted or
high concentration is being used. If spillage
occurs, wash the affected area immediately
with water.

WARNING
If the vehicle is operated in temperatures
below 5oC (40oF), use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection. In cold weather, failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection
H6266G could result in impaired windshield vision
and increase the risk of a vehicle crash.
The windshield washer reservoir supplies both
front and rear window washer jets and Note: State and local regulations may restrict
headlamp washer jets. the use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs),
Check the reservoir level at least every week which are commonly used as antifreeze agents
and top-up with windshield washer fluid. in washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC
Operate the washer switches periodically to content should be used only if it provides
check the washer jets are clear and properly adequate freeze resistance for all regions and
directed. climates in which the vehicle will be operated.
Note: Ensure an approved windshield washer
fluid is used in the windshield washer reservoir
to prevent freezing.

WARNING
Some windshield wash products are
inflammable, particularly if high or undiluted
concentrations are exposed to sparking. DO
NOT allow windshield wash to come into
contact with open flames or sources of
ignition.

229
L

Washers
WASHER JETS Rear

Front
The windshield washer jets are set during
manufacture and should not need adjusting.
However, if adjustment is ever necessary, insert
a needle into the jet orifice and lever gently to
position each jet so that the spray is directed
towards the center of the windshield.

H6269G

Headlamp
The spray jets are set during manufacture and
should not need to be adjusted.

H6267L

Should any jet become blocked, insert a needle


or thin strand of wire into the orifice to clear the
blockage.

230
R

Wiper Blades
Wiper Blades

WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT To replace, position the wiper arm into the
Only fit replacement wiper blades that are aperture in the middle of the blade assembly
identical to the original specification. and push firmly into position until the blade
clips into place.
Grease, silicone and gasoline-based products
impair the blade's wiping capability. Wash the Rear
wiper blades in warm soapy water and
periodically check their condition.
If signs of hardness or cracking in the rubber
are found, or if the wipers leave streaks or
unwiped areas of the glass during use, then the
wiper blades should be replaced.
Clean the glass regularly with an approved
glass cleaner and ensure it is thoroughly
cleaned before fitting replacement wiper
blades.
Front

H6272G

Lift the wiper away from the rear window.


Press the tab (arrowed in inset) to release the
blade assembly and slide the assembly off the
end of the wiper arm. Carefully replace the arm
in its stowed position.
To replace, position the blade assembly onto
the inside of the wiper arm and push firmly into
H6270L
position until the blade clips into place.
Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield
and pivot the blade assembly away from the
arm. Press the tab (arrowed in inset), to release
the blade assembly and slide the assembly off
the end of the wiper arm. Carefully replace the
arm to its stowed position.

231
L

Battery
Battery

BATTERY MAINTENANCE WARNING


The battery is designed to be maintenance free, Batteries contain acid, which is both
so topping-up is unnecessary. corrosive and poisonous. If spillage occurs:
• On clothing or the skin - remove any
contaminated clothing immediately,
flush the skin with large amounts of
water, and seek medical attention
urgently.
• In the eyes - flush with clean water
immediately for at least 15 minutes. Seek
medical attention urgently.
Always wear eye protection when working
around batteries.
Swallowing battery acid can be fatal unless
IMMEDIATE action is taken - seek medical
attention urgently.
During normal operation batteries emit
explosive hydrogen gas - ensure sparks and
naked lights are kept away from the engine
compartment.
0
1
BAC 001131

For your safety, remove all metal wrist bands


L7MTA

2
3
1205

H6273L and jewellery before working in the engine


compartment and NEVER allow the battery
Disconnecting the battery terminals or vehicle leads to make contact
with tools or metal parts of the vehicle.
If the vehicle is already locked and alarmed, you
will first have to unlock and disarm it using the Battery terminals and related accessories
remote control. See LOCKING/UNLOCKING, contain harmful lead and lead compounds.
34. Wash hands after handling.
Wait two minutes for the engine management
system to power down.
Open the hood. See HOOD OPENING, 219.
Disconnect ONLY the negative (-) terminal of
the battery.

232
R

Battery
Reconnecting the battery To remove: disconnect the negative (-) cable
Ensure that everything requiring power from first and then the positive (+) cable. When
the battery (lamps, audio, etc.) is switched off. reconnecting, connect the positive cable first
and then the negative cable. Do not allow the
Reconnect the battery lead.
battery terminals to make contact with metal
Note: If the battery was disconnected while it parts of the vehicle.
had an insufficient charge to disarm the
To release the battery from the vehicle, undo
anti-theft alarm, the alarm could sound on
the nuts securing the battery clamping plate
reconnection. Operating the remote control or
and remove the clamping plate.
inserting the key into the starter switch will
disarm the alarm. When replacing, ensure the battery is fitted the
right way round and the clamping plate is
Insert the starter key and turn to position ll.
secure. Tighten the clamping plate nuts until
Operate the Electric Park Brake (EPB) to the clamping plate is free from movement, but
extinguish the amber warning lamp. do not overtighten.
Effects of battery disconnection Replacement batteries
Following disconnection and subsequent Only fit a Land Rover approved replacement
reconnection of the vehicle battery, a number of battery.
the vehicle systems will be reset automatically.
This may take a few minutes and with some WARNING
systems, sensors have to detect certain actions Non Land Rover approved batteries could
whilst driving before full operability returns. cause a fire hazard when connected to the
This in no way affects the safe operation of the vehicle’s electrical system.
vehicle.
Battery removal and replacement Battery specification

WARNING Battery type H7


ALWAYS remove the starter key before
Voltage and polarity 12V, negative (-) earth
disconnecting the battery. Failure to do this
may cause a failure of the airbag SRS.
Battery disposal
Do not reverse the polarity of the battery - the
electrical system may be damaged if the Used batteries should be recycled.
battery leads are connected to the wrong However, batteries are hazardous - you
terminals. should seek advice about disposal from
a Land Rover Dealer or your local authority.
Caution: Keep the battery upright at all times
- damage will be caused if the battery is tilted
more than 45 degrees.
DO NOT run the engine with the battery
disconnected; or disconnect the battery with
the engine running.

233
L

Battery
Battery charging

WARNING
Batteries generate explosive gases, contain
corrosive acid and produce levels of electric
current sufficient to cause serious injury.
While charging, shield your eyes or avoid
leaning over the battery and keep the area
around the top of the battery well ventilated.
Do not allow naked lights near the battery
(batteries generate inflammable hydrogen
during and after charging).

While charging, always heed the following


precautions:
• Before charging, disconnect and remove
the battery from the vehicle - charging the
battery with the cables connected may
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
• Make sure the battery charger leads are
securely clamped to the battery terminals
BEFORE switching on the battery charger.
DO NOT move the leads once the charger is
switched on.
• The battery will be charged sufficiently
once the battery condition indicator shows
GREEN. When charging is finished, switch
off the battery charger BEFORE
disconnecting the leads from the battery
terminals.
Note: Be aware that a battery will take longer to
charge in a cold environment.
After charging, leave the battery for an hour
BEFORE reconnection to the vehicle - this will
allow time for explosive gases to disperse,
thereby minimising the risk of fire or explosion.

234
R

Tires
Tires

CARING FOR YOUR TIRES Safety practices

WARNING WARNING
DEFECTIVE TIRES ARE DANGEROUS. Do not • Avoid spinning the tire. The forces
drive if any tire is damaged, is excessively created by rapidly spinning a tire can
worn, or is inflated to an incorrect pressure. cause failure of, and damage to, the tire
structure.
ALWAYS replace worn or defective tires with
the factory recommended specifiation. See • If the tire does spin, never exceed the
Wheels and Tires, 296. Failure to do so may 50 km/h (30 mph) point indicated on the
affect the safe handling of the vehicle. speedometer.
• Do not allow anyone to stand near or
Always drive with consideration for the directly ahead of a tire that might spin.
condition of the tires, and regularly inspect the
tread and side walls for any sign of distortion The way you drive has a great deal to do with
(bulges), cuts or wear. your tire mileage and safety. Cultivate good
The most common causes of tire failure are: driving habits for your own benefit:
• Bumping against curbs. • Observe posted speed limits.
• Driving over deep potholes in the road. • Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
• Driving with under or over inflated tires. • Avoid potholes and objects on the road.
Caution: If possible, protect tires from • Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against
contamination by oil, grease, fuel and other the curb when parking.
automotive fluids. Tire glossary
Caution: Lower profile tires may be more A glossary of the terms and definitions
susceptible to damage caused by hazards in associated with tire pressures and vehicle
the road and even more so from hazards found weights is included in this section, see TIRE
in off-road conditions. Care should be taken GLOSSARY, 248.
to avoid such hazards when operating the
vehicle. Valves
Tires of the correct type, manufacture and Keep the valve caps screwed down firmly - they
dimensions, with correct cold inflation prevent dirt from entering the valve. Check the
pressures are an integral part of every vehicle’s valve for leaks (listen for a tell-tale hissing)
design. Regular maintenance of tires when you check the tire pressure.
contributes not only to safety, but to the
designed function of the vehicle. Road-holding,
steering and braking are especially vulnerable
to incorrectly pressurised, badly fitted or worn
tires.

235
L

Tires
Tire pressures Note: The pressure for your spare tire should
be set to the highest value given for your
WARNING vehicle’s wheel/tire size combination and
Never drive your vehicle if the tire pressures adjusted after fitment.
are incorrect.
Checking tire pressures
Under-inflation causes excessive flexing and
uneven wear to the tire. This can lead to WARNING
sudden failure. Over-inflation causes a harsh If the vehicle has been parked in strong
ride, uneven tire wear and poor handling. sunlight or used in high ambient
Pressure checks should only be carried out temperatures, DO NOT reduce tire pressures;
when the tires are cold (the vehicle has been instead, move the vehicle into the shade and
stationary for three hours or more). allow the tires to cool before checking.
A hot tire, at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure, is dangerously All operating kPa bar lb/in2
under-inflated. conditions
Full size tires F 260 2.6 38
Correctly inflated tires will ensure that you
R 290 2.9 42
enjoy the best combination of tire life, ride
Compact spare F & R 420 4.2 60
comfort, fuel economy and road handling.
Tire pressures should be checked at least once The following procedure should be used to
a week with normal road use, but should be check and adjust the tire pressures:
checked DAILY if the vehicle is used off-road.
Always check tire pressures before a long 1. Remove the valve cap.
journey. 2. Firmly attach a tire pressure gauge/inflator
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation to the valve.
pressures (including the spare wheel) when the 3. Read the tire pressure from the gauge. If
tires are cold - be aware that it only takes required, add air to the tire.
1.5 km (1 mile) of driving to warm up the tires 4. If air is added to the tire, remove the gauge
sufficiently to affect the tire pressures. Land from the valve and re-attach it before
Rover strongly recommends using a reliable checking that the pressure is correct.
tire pressure gauge, as automatic service Failure to remove and re-attach the gauge
station gauges may be inaccurate. from the valve could cause the gauge to
Air pressure naturally increases in warm tires; if show an incorrect reading.
it is necessary to check the tires when they are 5. If too much air is added, remove the gauge
warm (after the vehicle has been driven for a from the valve and allow air out of the tire
while), you should expect the pressures to have by pressing the center of the valve.
increased between 30 - 40 kPa (0.3 - 0.4 bar, Reconnect the gauge to the valve, and
4 - 6 lb/in2). In this circumstance, DO NOT let check that the air pressure is correct. If the
air out of the tires in order to match the pressure is still not correct, repeat this
recommended pressures. process and re-check.
6. Refit the valve cap.

236
R

Tires
Tire wear Punctured tires
Your vehicle is fitted with tubeless tires, which
WARNING
may not leak if penetrated by a sharp object,
Never drive your vehicle if the tires are badly
provided the object remains in the tire. If you
worn, cut or damaged.
are aware of this occurring, reduce speed
immediately and drive with caution until the
spare wheel can be fitted.
A puncture of this kind will eventually cause the
tire to lose pressure, which is why regular (and
frequent) checking of tire pressures is
important. Punctured or damaged tires must be
permanently repaired, where possible within
H6275G industry legislation by a qualified technician, or
replaced as soon as possible.
The tires fitted as original equipment to your
vehicle have wear indicators moulded into the If you sustain a puncture, reduce driving speed
tread pattern. When the tread has worn down to immediately in a straight line where possible,
1.6 mm (1/16 in.) the indicators start appearing whilst avoiding heavy braking or sharp steering
at the surface of the tread pattern, producing inputs. Pull over at the first safe place possible
the effect of a continuous band of rubber across to change your tire.
the width of the tire. Highway hazards
A tire MUST be replaced as soon as an indicator No matter how carefully you drive, there is
band becomes visible or the tread depth always the possibility of a puncture on the
reaches the minimum permitted by legislation. highway. In this event, drive slowly to the
Note: If tire wear is uneven (on one side of the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further
tire only) or becomes abnormally excessive, the damage the flat tire, but your safety is more
wheel alignment should be checked by your important.
Land Rover Dealer. If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
Tread depth must be checked regularly (at disturbance while driving, or you suspect that
every maintenance service, or more your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
frequently). Always replace a tire before the immediately reduce your speed. Drive with
tread reaches a remaining depth of 1.6 mm caution and safely pull off the road at the
(1/16 in.). DO NOT drive with tires worn to this earliest opportunity. Stop and inspect the tire
limit, the safety of the vehicle and occupants for damage. If the tire is under-inflated or
will be adversely affected. damaged, remove the tire and wheel and
Note: After off-road use, check to make sure replace it with your spare. If you cannot detect
there are no cuts or bulges in the tires or a cause, have the vehilce towed to the nearest
exposure of the ply or cord structure. vehicle or tire retailer to have the vehicle
inspected.

237
L

Tires
Replacement tires Ideally, tires should be replaced as sets of four,
but if this is not possible, replace the tires as
WARNING axle sets.
Wheel rims and tires are matched to suit the
Although standard tires do have all weather
handling characteristics of the vehicle. For
capability, for the maximum winter or off-road
safety, ALWAYS check that replacement tires
capability, alternative tires are available and
comply with the original specification (see
should be fitted if extreme conditions are going
WHEELS AND TIRES, 296) and that the load
to be encountered.
and speed ratings shown on the side wall are
the same as that of the original equipment. Age degradation
Contact your Land Rover Dealer for further Tires degrade over time, even when they are not
information or assistance. being used. It is recommended that tires
ALWAYS use the same make and type of generally be replaced after 6 years of normal
radial-ply tires front and rear. DO NOT use service. Degradation can be caused by ultra
bias-ply tires, or interchange tires from front violet (U.V.) exposure, hot climates or frequent
to rear. high loading conditions.
For optimum performance and handling, Replace the spare tire when you replace the
ALWAYS replace tires with the same make other road tires due to the ageing of the spare
and type as those fitted from new at the tire.
factory. If these tires are not available,
Tire use after vehicle storage
consult your Land Rover Dealer for advice on
Land Rover approved alternatives. Failure to After a long period of a vehicle standing, tires
do so may adversely affect vehicle handling. may become locally distorted with a flat area.
This will cause an uneven ride for a few miles
Your vehicle is fitted with tubeless road
until the tires have warmed up and the flat
wheels that will NOT accept inner tubes. DO
rounds off.
NOT fit a tubed tire.
Always ensure replacement tires have the
correct rating and specifications (e.g. load
index, size, speed rating) for your vehicle.
Contact your Land Rover Dealer for more
information.
Do not exceed the tire speed capacity
recommended by the tire manufacturer.
Always have the wheels re-balanced after
replacing tires.

Tires of the correct size and type, but of


different make have widely varying
characteristics. It is therefore recommended
that only Land Rover approved tires are fitted to
all wheels.

238
R

Tires
Compact spare tire Directional tires
The following precautions must be observed Directional tires give greater benefit when they
when the compact spare wheel is in use: rotate in a forward direction, i.e., when the
vehicle is moving forward. They give enhanced
WARNING levels of deep-water grip while still maintaining
Drive cautiously; the compact spare wheel low tire noise generation.
tire is smaller in size and higher in pressure
than a regular tire. It will cause a harsher ride
and may have less traction on some road A
surfaces. If driving off-road on a compact
spare wheel, drive with extra caution.
• The compact spare wheel is for temporary
use only. It must be replaced by a
normal-sized wheel and tire as soon as
possible. B
• Only ONE compact spare wheel is to be
used on the vehicle at any one time.
• Do not drive at a speed exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
• The tire pressure in the compact spare
wheel/tire should be as detailed in the
tire pressure table. See Checking tire
pressures, 236.

H6276G

Should a tire be fitted to a vehicle in the wrong


directional sense, these benefits will only be
gained if the tire is remounted to the rim so it
rotates in the direction indicated on the
sidewall.
Typical direction indicators are shown in the
illustration below.

239
L

Tires
SNOW CHAINS
Snow chains are designed for use on
hard-surface roads in extreme snow conditions
only, and are not recommended for off-road
use. If it is necessary to fit snow chains to your
vehicle, ALWAYS observe the following:
• Front wheels: Snow chains can only be
fitted to the front wheels of vehicles
equipped with 18 inch wheels.
• Rear wheels: Snow chains MUST NOT be
fitted to the rear wheels of the vehicle.
• Snow chains MUST NOT be fitted to a
compact/temporary spare wheel.
• ONLY Land Rover approved snow chains
should be used. These are designed for
your vehicle and will eliminate any risk of
damage to other components. Approved
snow chains are only available from a Land
Rover Dealer.
• Always adhere to the snow chain fitting and
retensioning instructions and the speed
limitations recommended for varying road
conditions. NEVER exceed 50 km/h
(30 mph).
• ONLY fit snow chains in pairs.
• Avoid tire damage by removing the chains
as soon as the road is free from snow.
• In some driving conditions, it may be
beneficial to deactivate Dynamic Stability
Control (DSC) in order to maximise
traction.

WARNING
DO NOT fit unapproved snow chains - this
could damage tires, wheels, suspension and
brake components and could result in damage
to the bodywork of the vehicle.

240
R

Tires
TIRE MARKINGS

3 4 5 6
2 7 8
1
9

15
10
14

13 11
12

H6580N

1. The P indicates the tire is for passenger 5. This two digit number is the wheel or rim
vehicles. diameter in inches. If you change your
2. This three digit number gives the width in wheel size, you will have to purchase new
millimetres of the tire from sidewall edge to tires to match the new wheel diameter.
sidewall edge. In general, the larger the 6. This two or three digit number is the tire’s
number, the wider the tire. load index. It is a measurement of how
3. This two digit number, known as the aspect much weight each tire can support.
ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of height to width Note: You may not find this information on
(this is also known as the tire profile). The all tires because it is not required by law.
lower the number, the shorter the tire’s
sidewall, is compared to it’s width.
4. The R stands for radial. Radial ply
construction of tires has been the industry
standard for many years.

241
L

Tires
7. The speed rating denotes the maximum 10. The number of plies indicates the number
speed at which a tire is designed to be of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
driven for extended periods of time. The In general, the greater the number of plies,
ratings range from 160km/h to 300 km/h the more weight a tire can support. Tire
(99 mph to 186 mph). These ratings are manufacturers also must indicate the
listed in the following table. materials in the tire, which include steel,
Note: You may not find this information on nylon, polyester, and others.
all tires because it is not required by law. 11. This number indicates the tire’s wear rate.
The higher the treadwear number is, the
Letter Speed Rating longer it should take for the tread to wear
down. For example, a tire graded 400
km/h mph
should last twice as long as a tire graded
Q 160 99
200.
R 170 106
12. This letter indicates a tire's ability to stop
S 180 112
on wet pavement. A higher graded tire
T 190 118
should allow you to stop your vehicle on
U 200 124 wet roads in a shorter distance than a tire
H 210 130 with a lower grade. Traction is graded from
V 240 149 highest to lowest as AA, A, B, and C.
W 270 168 13. This number indicates the maximum load
Y 300 186 in kilograms and pounds that can be
carried by the tire.
8. This begins with the letters DOT and 14. This letter indicates a tire’s resistance to
indicates that the tire meets all Federal heat. The temperature grade is for a tire
standards. The next two numbers or letters that is inflated properly and not overloaded.
are the plant code where it was Excessive speed, under-inflation or
manufactured, and the last four numbers excessive loading, either separately or in
represent the week and year the tire was combination, can cause heat build-up and
built. For example, the numbers 3105 possible tire failure. From highest to
means the 31st week of 2005. The other lowest, a tire’s resistance to heat is graded
numbers are marketing codes used at the as A, B, or C.
manufacturer’s discretion. This
information can be used by manufacturers 15. This number is the greatest amount of air
and consumers if a tire defect requires a pressure that should ever be put in the tire
recall. under normal driving conditions. However,
always inflate tires to the recommended
9. The M+S or M/S indicates that the tire has pressures. See Tire pressures, 236.
some mud and snow capability. Most radial
tires have these markings, as they have
some mud and snow capability.

242
R

Tires
TIRE INFORMATION LABELS Two tire information labels are visible on the
pillar behind the driver’s door (known as the B
Tire pressure label/placard (U.S. only) pillar), giving information specific to the wheel
and tire equipment fitted to the vehicle when it
MFD BY LANDROVER IN THE UK
was built.
DATE : MM/YY GVWR: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
GAWR FRONT: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
The top label contains information relating to
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
tire and wheel sizes and recommended
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
TXXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIM, AT XXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
GAWR REAR: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
pressures for all wheel and tire combinations.
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
The lower label contains the following
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
TXXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIM, AT XXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE
information:
U.S.FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE • The maximum number of occupants (1),
TESTMARK1234567890
divided between the front (2) and rear (3)
TYPE : MULTI - PURPOSE PASSENGER VEHICLE of the vehicle.
• The vehicle capacity weight (4), which
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION includes the weight of the driver,
SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXXXlbs
passengers and cargo.
TIRE
FRONT
SIZE
XXX/XXRXX
COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE SEE OWNER’S
XXPSI XXXkpa MANUAL FOR
• The size of the tires (5) with which the
RTC500490

REAR XXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa


ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
vehicle was originally equipped, including
SPARE TXXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa
the compact spare (6).
H6731N • Cold inflation pressures for the front and
rear tires (7), and compact spare tire (8).
Note: The label must not be changed, even if
different wheels are fitted at a later stage.

1 2 3

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION


SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXXXlbs 4
TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE SEE OWNER’S
FRONT XXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa MANUAL FOR
RTC500490

XXX/XXRXX
ADDITIONAL
REAR XXPSI XXXkpa
INFORMATION
SPARE TXXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa

H6732N 5 6 7 8

243
L

Tires
Tire pressure label/placard (Canada only)

LANDROVER
DATE : MM/YY
GVWR/PNBV : ICES/NMB - 002
XXXXKG ( XXXXLB )
GAWR FRONT/PNBE AVANT : XXXXKG ( XXXXLB )
TIRES/ RIMS/ PRESSURE (COLD) /
PNEUS JANTES PRESSION (A FROID) /
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
TXXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
GAWR REAR/PNBE ARRIER : XXXXKG ( XXXXLB )
TIRES/ RIMS/ PRESSURE (COLD) /
PNEUS JANTES PRESSION (A FROID) /
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
TXXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
VIN : TESTVIN1234567890
TYPE : MPV/VTUM

H5959C

A tire information label is visible on the B pillar.


The label contains information relating to tire
and wheel sizes and recommended pressures
for all wheel and tire combinations fitted to the
vehicle.
Note: The label must not be changed, even if
different wheels are fitted at a later stage.

244
R

Tires
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
United States Department of
are; AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent a
Transportation/Uniform Tire Quality Grades
tire’s ability to stop on a wet pavement as
The following information relates to the tire measured under controlled conditions on
grading system developed by the National specified government test surfaces of asphalt
Highway Traffic Safety Administration which and concrete.
will grade tires by tread wear, traction and
temperature performance. WARNING
Note: Tires that have deep tread, and winter The traction grade assigned to a tire is based
tires, are exempt from these marking on straight-ahead braking tests, and does not
requirements. include; acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Quality grades, where applicable, can be found
on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder
and maximum section width. Temperature
For example: The temperature grades, from highest to
lowest, are, A, B, and C. These grades represent
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A a tires resistance to the generation of heat, and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
In addition to the marking requirements, controlled conditions on an indoor laboratory
passenger car tires must conform to Federal test wheel.
Safety Requirements. Sustained high temperatures can cause the
Treadwear material of a tire to degenerate, and reduce the
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
sudden tire failure.
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified C grade is the minimum performance level
government test course. which all passenger car tires must meet under
For example; a tire graded 150 would wear one the Federal Motor Safety Standard (FMVSS)
and a half times as well on a government test 109.
course as a tire graded 100. However, the Grades B and A represent higher levels of
relative performance of tires depends on the performance on the laboratory test than the
actual conditions of their use, and may depart minimum required by law.
significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices, and WARNING
differences in road characteristics and climate. The temperature grade for a tire is
established with the correct loading and
inflation pressure. Excessive speed, under
inflation, or overloading, either separately,
or in combination, can cause heat build up
and possible tire failure.

245
L

Tires
PRODUCTION OPTION WEIGHTS WARNING
(USA only) Do not exceed the vehicle capacity weight
This table lists the production options weights. (the total weight of driver, passengers and
To calculate the curb weight of your vehicle, cargo) given on the tire information label, see
add the weight of all production options to the TIRE INFORMATION LABELS, 243
basic curb weight for your vehicle.
Note: The table only lists optional equipment
that weighs more than 1,4 kg (3 lb.).

Curb weight, no options fitted Tailgate badge kg lb.


V8, 19 in. wheels SPORT V8 HSE 2503 5518
V8, 20 in. wheels SPORT SUPERCHARGED 2591 5712
Production options
Full-size 18 in. 5-spoke spare wheel 4 8.8
Full-size 18 in. 10-spoke spare wheel 4.5 9.9
Full-size 19 in. spare wheel 8 17.6
Locking rear differential 2.3 5.1
Sunroof front 27.3 60.1
Towing kit 5.0 11.0
Rear seat air conditioning 9.7 21.34
Navigation system 3.3 7.3
Head curtain airbags 2.0 4.4

246
R

Tires
Steps for determining correct load limit The number and weight of passengers will
affect the cargo and luggage load capacity. In
WARNING the example above, the cargo and luggage load
Do not exceed the vehicle capacity weight capacity is 650 lb. However, if fewer
(the total weight of driver, passengers and passengers ride in the vehicle, the luggage load
cargo) given, see TIRE INFORMATION capacity will increase. If this vehicle carries
LABELS, 243. three 150 lb. passengers, the cargo and
luggage load capacity will increase to 950 lb.:
1. Locate the statement ‘The combined (3 x 150 = 450 lb., and 1400 - 450 = 950 lb.).
weight of occupants and cargo should
If the passengers weigh more, the cargo and
never exceed XXXX kg or YYYY lb.’ on your
luggage load capacity will decrease.
vehicle’s placard, (see TIRE INFORMATION
LABELS, 243). WARNING
2. Determine the combined weight of the The weight of accessories must also be
driver and passengers that will be riding in subtracted from the available cargo and
the vehicle. luggage load capacity. If you are unsure of the
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver weight of any accessories fitted to your
and passengers from XXXX kg or YYYY lb. vehicle, contact your Land Rover Dealer.
(weight given on placard). Overloading the vehicle will have an adverse
4. The resulting figure equals the available affect on braking and handling
amount of cargo and luggage load characteristics, which could compromise
capacity. For example, if the ‘YYYY’ amount your safety. Overloading a vehicle may also
equals 1400 lb., and there will be five 150 cause tire damage or failure.
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount Never overload your vehicle.
of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lb.:
(5 x 150 = 750, and
1400 - 750 = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult TOWING, 200, to
determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle. (Subtract the trailer tongue load
from the available cargo and luggage load
capacity.)

247
L

Tires
TIRE GLOSSARY Vehicle capacity weight:
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg
Cold tire pressure:
(150 lb.) for each of the vehicle’s designated
Pressure in a cold tire i.e. has been driven for seating capacity.
less than one mile or has been standing for
three hours or more. Maximum loaded vehicle weight:
This is the sum of:
Maximum inflation pressure:
• Curb weight.
Maximum air pressure, to which a cold tire may
be inflated, this figure (in lb/in2 and kPa) is • Accessory weight.
moulded onto the sidewall of a tire. However, • Vehicle capacity weight.
always inflate tires to the recommended • Production options weight.
pressures. See Tire pressures, 236.
Rim:
Curb weight:
A metal support for a tire, or a tire and tube
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard assembly, upon which the tire beads are
equipment including the maximum capacity of seated.
fuel, oil, coolant and if so equipped, optional
equipment. Bead:
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
Gross vehicle weight:
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
The maximum permissible weight of a motor shaped to fit the rim.
vehicle with driver, passengers, payload
equipment and towing attachment load (where
applicable).
Accessory weight:
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and
heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not).
Production options weight:
The combined weight of those installed
production options weighing over 1.4 kg (3 lb.)
in excess of those standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levellers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery and special trim.

248
R

Tire Pressure Monitoring System


TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING Your vehicle will also indicate a TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System

SYSTEM (TPMS) malfunction by illuminating the warning telltale,


displaying the text message TIRE PRESSURE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire
MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT and sounding
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) which
an audible warning. When a malfunction occurs
monitors pressure in each tire, including the
the system may not be able to detect or signal
full-size spare tire. Temporary spare tires are
low tire pressure as intended.TPMS
not fitted with sensors and are consequently
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
not monitored.
reasons, including the installation of
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), incompatible replacement tires on the vehicle.
should be checked monthly when cold and Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended after replacing one or more tires on your vehicle
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle to ensure that the replacement tires are
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your compatible with the TPMS.
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
Note: The TPMS does NOT reinflate tires.
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the WARNING
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) The tire pressures should be checked
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has regularly using an accurate pressure gauge
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring when the tires are cold. Failure to properly
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire maintain your tire pressures could increase
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires the risk of tire failure, with consequential loss
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, of vehicle control and personal injury.
when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, The TPMS can NOT register damage to the
you should stop and check your tires as soon as tire. Regularly check the condition of your
possible, and inflate them to the proper tires, especially if the vehicle is driven
pressure. Driving on a significantly off-road.
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also Caution: When inflating the tires, care should
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and be taken to avoid bending or damage to the
may affect the vehicles handling and stopping TPMS valves. Always ensure correct
ability. alignment of the inflation head to the valve
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for stem.
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.

249
L

Tire Pressure Monitoring System


TPMS operation Full size spare wheel and tire change
The TPMS monitors the pressure of the tires via Should it be necessary to change a wheel and
sensors located in each wheel and a receiver tire with the spare, then the system will
located within the vehicle. Communication automatically recognise the change in wheel
between sensor and receiver is via Radio positions. After driving above 25 km/h
Frequency (RF) signals. (18 mph) any deflation warnings will clear,
The tire pressure warning typically within 5 minutes.
comprises a yellow warning Temporary spare wheel and tire change
indicator (telltale) within the
Should it be necessary to change a wheel and
instrument pack and an associated message
tire with the temporary spare, then the system
within the message center.
will automatically recognise the change in
wheel positions. Then after approximately 10
minutes of driving above 25 km/h (18 mph) the
yellow warning telltale will illuminate, a text
message e.g FRONT RIGHT TIRE PRESSURE
NOT MONITORED will be displayed and
accompanied by an audible warning.
If a tire needs to be changed
It is recommended that you should always have
your tires serviced by a retailer or qualified
technician. If TPMS is fitted, each wheel and tire
assembly, with the exception of a temporary
spare, is equipped with a tire pressure sensor
connected to the tire valve stem.
EXT 72 F In order to avoid damage to the sensor, the tires
MUST be removed and refitted to the road
wheel in a specified manner. Care must be
taken to avoid contact between the bead of the
tire and the sensor during removal and refitting
of the tire, otherwise the sensor may become
CHECK ALL damaged and/or inoperable.
TIRE PRESSURES
Valve stem seal, washer, nut, valve core and
cap should be replaced at every tire change.
H6563N
Valve stem seal, washer and nut must be
Spare tire pressure replaced if the valve retention nut is loosened.
The full size spare tire should be inflated to the Sensor units and nuts must be refitted using
highest pressure for the specified tire size. See the correct torque.
TIRE PRESSURES, 307. To remove a sensor unscrew the valve retention
nut.

250
R

Tire Pressure Monitoring System


Replacement sensor fitment procedure
A replacement sensor must be fitted to a
running wheel in order to be recognised by the
system. Recognition only occurs when the
vehicle is driven above 25 km/h (18 mph) for
approximately 10 minutes.
Should the TPMS warning for any wheel not
clear, even after ensuring correct inflation and
driving for more than 10 minutes above
25 km/h (18 mph), please consult your Land
Rover Retailer.
Type approval numbers
The TPMS devices comply with part 15 of the
FCC rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference
2. This device must accept interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
The TPMS radio frequency approval numbers
for the USA and Canada are shown below:-
USA FCC ID: KR5S120123, TX KR55WK47594,
RX 5WK4887.
Canada IC: 267T-S120123, 267T-5WK47594,
CAN2671032336A.

251
L

Cleaning and Vehicle Care


Cleaning and Vehicle Care

WASHING YOUR VEHICLE Removing tar spots


Use methylated spirits to remove tar spots and
stubborn grease stains from paintwork. Then
wash immediately with soapy water to remove
all traces of spirit.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used on highways to
control snow and ice and dust can collect on
underbody parts. If these materials are not
removed, accelerated corrosion can occur. Use
a hose to regularly flush the underbody with
plain water, taking particular care to thoroughly
clean those areas where mud and other debris
H6279G can easily collect.
Similarly, after off-road driving or wading in
Caution: Some high pressure cleaning muddy or salt water conditions, use a hose to
systems are sufficiently powerful to penetrate wash underbody components and other
door and window seals and damage rubbing exposed parts of the vehicle.
strips and locking mechanisms. Never aim
When using a hose, do not direct the jet into the
the water jet directly at the engine air intake,
engine air intake, which is located on the
heater air intakes, body and sunroof seals, or
right-hand-side front fender (viewed from
at any components that might easily be
driver’s position), or the heater air intake ducts,
damaged. Do not use a power wash system in
or through the wheel trim apertures onto the
the engine bay area.
brake components, or at the door, window or
Read individual product warnings before sunroof seals, where water pressure could
using any car cleaning or washing products. penetrate the seals.
Remove heavy deposits of mud and dirt with a If damage or corrosion to the underbody area is
hose before washing the vehicle. detected, please have the vehicle checked by a
Wash the vehicle frequently using a sponge and Land Rover Dealer at the earliest opportunity.
generous quantities of cold or lukewarm water
containing a car shampoo. Rinse and dry off
with a chamois leather.
• Do not use hot water!
• Do not use detergent soap products or
washing-up liquid!
• In hot weather, do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight.

252
R

Cleaning and Vehicle Care


Body protection CLEANING THE INTERIOR
After washing, inspect the paintwork for Caution: Read individual product warnings
damage. Any stone chips, fractures or deep before using any car cleaning or washing
scratches in the bodywork should be repaired products.
promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly and
can develop into major repair expense. Some Plastic materials
exterior panels of your vehicle are made of Clean plastic-faced or cloth-covered surfaces
aluminium which will not corrode in the same with warm water and a non-detergent soap and
manner as steel. However, any damage should wipe with a clean cloth.
still receive prompt attention. Minor chips and Note: DO NOT polish instrument panel
scratches can be repaired with touch-up components - for safety, these should remain
materials available from your Land Rover non-reflective.
Dealer. Larger areas of damage need to be
corrected to professional standards Leather
immediately. Land Rover recommends that leather is cleaned
and protected at least every six months.
Polishing
Leather cleaning kit, BAC500490, or equivalent,
Occasionally treat the paint surface with an
is recommended and endorsed by Land Rover
approved polish containing the following
for this purpose. Use in accordance with the
properties:
instructions printed on the label.
• Very mild abrasives to remove surface
Note: Some materials/fabrics are prone to
contamination without removing or
dye-transfer which can cause unsightly
damaging the paint.
discoloration of lighter colored leathers.
• Filling compounds that will fill scratches Affected areas should be cleaned and
and reduce their visibility. re-protected as soon as possible.
• Wax to provide a protective coating DO NOT use chemical or abrasive materials to
between the paint and the elements. clean leather. Gasoline, methylated spirits,
Note: Contact your Land Rover Dealer to obtain alcohol, detergents, washing-up liquid,
approved materials. household cleaners, furniture polishes/creams
or solvents should never be used on leather.
Glass and mirrors
While these products may give initially
Clean the rear window with a soft cloth to avoid impressive results, their use will lead to rapid
damaging the heating and antenna elements. deterioration of the leather and will invalidate
DO NOT scrape the glass or use an abrasive the warranty.
cleaning fluid.
Door mirror glass is particularly susceptible to
damage. Wash with soapy water. DO NOT use
abrasive cleaning compounds or metal
scrapers to remove ice.

253
L

Cleaning and Vehicle Care


Carpet and fabrics Airbag module covers
Clean with diluted nylon upholstery cleaner -
WARNING
test on a concealed area first.
To prevent airbag SRS damage, the steering
Instrument pack, clock and audio wheel center pad, side airbags and area of
Clean with a dry cloth only! DO NOT use the instrument panel containing the
cleaning fluids or sprays. passenger airbag should ONLY be cleaned
sparingly with a damp cloth and upholstery
Seat belts cleaner.
Extend the belts, then use warm water and a DO NOT allow these areas to be flooded with
non-detergent soap to clean. DO NOT use liquid, and DO NOT use gasoline, detergent,
cleaning solvents. Allow the belts to dry cleaning solvents, furniture cream or
naturally, and do not retract them or use the polishes.
vehicle until they are completely dry.

254
R

Identification Numbers
Identification Numbers

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION WARNING


NUMBER (VIN) DO NOT exceed the gross weight or axle loads
If you need to communicate with a Land Rover stated on the certification label attached to
Dealer, you may be asked to quote the Vehicle the vehicle. Exceeding allowable vehicle and
Identification Number (VIN). axle loads will increase the risk of fire or
suspension failure, increase vehicle brake
stopping distance, and adversely affect
MFD BY LANDROVER IN THE UK vehicle handling and stability which may
DATE : MM/YY GVWR: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
GAWR FRONT: XXXXKG (XXXXLB) result in a crash or roll-over.
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
TXXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIM, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD Federal VIN plate
GAWR REAR: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
TXXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIM, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE
U.S.FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY
SALLMAMA31A002040
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE

TESTMARK1234567890

TYPE : MULTI - PURPOSE PASSENGER VEHICLE

H5963N

The VIN, and other information concerning the


vehicle, can be found on the certification label H5964N
affixed to the lock-face of the front left-hand
In addition to the certification label, the Federal
door.
VIN plate is mounted to the vehicle body so that
Note: The information displayed on the it is visible through the lowest part of the left
certification label is market-dependent and side of the windshield. The VIN is also stamped
vehicle type specification may differ from the on the vehicle’s chassis.
example.

255
L

Parts and Accessories


Parts and Accessories

PARTS AND ACCESSORIES Land Rover parts are the only parts built to
original equipment specifications AND
WARNING approved by Land Rover designers; this means
DO NOT fit unapproved accessories or that every single part and accessory has been
conversions, as they could affect the safety of rigorously tested by the same engineering team
the vehicle. that designed and built the vehicle and can
Land Rover will not accept any liability for therefore be guaranteed for twelve months with
death, personal injury or damage to property unlimited mileage.
which may occur as a direct result of fitment A full list and description of all accessories is
of non-approved accessories or the carrying available from Land Rover Dealer.
out of non-approved conversions to Land
Rover vehicles. Electrical equipment

Land Rover strongly advise against making WARNING


any modifications to the suspension or It is extremely hazardous to fit or replace
steering system. This could seriously affect parts or accessories whose installation
the handling and stability of the vehicle requires the dismantling of, or addition to,
leading to loss of control or roll-over. either the electrical, fuel or SRS airbag
systems as damage to the proper operation of
The vehicle has been designed, built and tested these systems could result.
to cope with a variety of off-road driving
conditions, some of which can place the ALWAYS consult a Land Rover Dealer before
severest possible demands on control systems fitting any accessory.
and components. As such, fitting replacement Fitting inferior quality parts or accessories, may
parts and accessories that have been developed be dangerous and could invalidate the vehicle
and tested to the same stringent standards as warranty.
the original components will safeguard the
continued reliability, safety and performance of It is recommended that you always consult a
the vehicle. Land Rover Dealer for advice regarding the
approval, suitability, installation and use of any
To augment the vehicle's already impressive parts or accessories before fitting.
performance, a comprehensive range of Land
Rover approved spare parts and accessories is In certain countries, it is illegal to fit parts which
available, enabling the vehicle to fulfil a wide have not been made to the vehicle
variety of roles, and enhancing and protecting manufacturers' specification.
the vehicle in the many tasks to which it can be Owners should ensure that any parts or
applied. accessories fitted to the vehicle while travelling
abroad will also conform to the legal
requirements of their own country when they
return home.

256
R

Parts and Accessories


SRS/Airbag

WARNING
The components that make up the SRS/airbag
are sensitive to electrical or physical
interference, either of which could easily
damage the system and cause inadvertent
operation or a malfunction of the airbag
module.
To prevent any SRS/airbag malfunction,
ALWAYS consult a Land Rover Dealer before
fitting any of the following:
• Electronic equipment such as a mobile
phone, two-way radio or in-car
entertainment system.
• Accessories attached to the front of the
vehicle.
• Any modification to the front of the
vehicle.
• Any modification involving the removal or
repair of any wiring or component in the
vicinity of any of the SRS components
(yellow wiring harness), including: the
steering wheel, steering column,
instrument and facia panels.
• Any modification to the facia panels or
steering wheel.

257
L

Wheel Changing
Roadside Emergency

TOOL KIT Content

Stored location
1
2

3 4

6
5
7

H6581N

The tool kit consists of:


1. Screwdriver handle
2. Screwdriver blade
3. Jack screw rotating hook
4. Extension piece
5. Wheel nut brace
H6281G
6. Wheel chocks
The tool tray is located under a lift-up panel set 7. Wheel change jack
in the loadspace floor.
Care of the jack
Note: Take careful note of the stowage position
of each of the tools as it is important to return Examine the jack occasionally, clean and grease
them to their correct position after use. the moving parts, particularly the screw thread,
to prevent corrosion.
To avoid contamination, the jack should always
be stowed in its fully closed position.

WARNING
After wheel changing, always secure tools,
chocks, jack and replaced wheel in their
correct storage positions. Such objects if not
properly stowed can become flying missiles
in a crash or roll-over, potentially causing
injury or death.

258
R

Wheel Changing
PUNCTURED TIRES
If you have a flat tire while driving:
• Do not brake heavily.
• Gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
• Hold the steering wheel firmly.
• Slowly move to a safe and suitable place at
the side of the road.
Wheel changing safety
If possible, choose a safe place to stop away
from the highway. Always ask your passengers
to get out of the vehicle and wait in a safe area
away from other traffic.Disconnect any
attached trailer or caravan.
Note: Switch on the hazard warning lamps to
H6283G
alert other road users.
Before changing a wheel, ensure that the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position (if
possible), apply the parkbrake and select P
(Park). Raise the air suspension to off-road
height.
Turn off the starter switch, remove the key and
engage the steering lock.
Using wheel chocks

WARNING
Before raising the vehicle, it is ESSENTIAL to
chock the road wheels in two places. This is
to increase stability while the vehicle is
raised.

If possible, position the vehicle on level ground,


chocking both sides of the wheel diagonally
opposite the one to be removed.
If jacking the vehicle on a slope is unavoidable, H6284G
place the chocks on the downhill side of the two
opposite wheels. The wheel chocks are stowed in the tool kit, as
shown in TOOL KIT, 258.

259
L

Wheel Changing
REMOVING THE SPARE WHEEL
Spare wheel
Always remove the spare wheel before jacking
up the vehicle.

WARNING
The wheels are extremely heavy. Take care
when manoeuvering the spare wheel.

H6286G

3. Fit the wheel nut brace to the wheel-hoist


winch nut and rotate counter-clockwise to
lower the spare wheel.
Caution: The mechanism has been
designed for use with the wheel nut
brace. DO NOT use power tools on the
wheel-hoist winch.

H6285
H6287G

1. Lift open the spare wheel mechanism When the wheel has reached the ground,
access hatch in the rear loadspace, and continue to wind the handle until the cable is
remove the jack from the tool tray. slack.
2. Tilt up the circular cap covering the spare Do not attempt to turn the winch beyond the
wheel storage nut. physical stop.

260
R

Wheel Changing

H6288G

4. Raise the wheel as indicated. Hold the cable


and tilt the lifting lug until it can be lifted
through the hole in the wheel, as shown
above.

261
L

Wheel Changing
CHANGING A WHEEL
Positioning the jack

H6289G

Right-hand side jacking points.


Caution: Remove the spare wheel before WARNING
jacking up the vehicle.
NEVER work beneath the vehicle with the jack
Before positioning the jack under the vehicle, as the only means of support. The jack is
ensure that the air suspension is set to designed for wheel changing only.
Off-road height.
NEVER place the jack on soft ground or over
Position the jack from the side of the vehicle, metal gratings or manhole covers. DO NOT
in line with the appropriate jacking point as place additional material between the jack
indicated. and the ground; this may jeopardise the
Raise the jack so that the pin in the head of safety of the jacking operation.
the jack only engages with a hole in the
chassis rail, or damage to the vehicle could
occur.

262
R

Wheel Changing

H6290G

Left-hand side jacking points.

263
L

Wheel Changing
Operating the jack Turn the jack lever clockwise to raise the jack
cradle until it engages with the jacking point.
Ensure that the base of the jack is in full contact
with the road surface.
Changing a wheel
1. Raise the vehicle until the tire is clear of the
ground.
2. Remove the wheel nuts and place to one
side to prevent them from being lost.
3. Remove the road wheel.
Note: DO NOT damage the style surface of
the wheel by placing it face down on the
road.
4. On alloy wheels, use an approved anti-seize
compound (available from a Land Rover
Dealer) to treat the wheel to hub mating
surfaces. This will minimise any tendency
for adhesion between the wheel and hub.
Ensure that no compound comes into
contact with the brake components or the
flat mounting surfaces of the wheel.
If, due to an emergency situation, this
treatment is not practicable; refit the spare
wheel for the time being, but remove and
treat the wheel at the earliest opportunity.
5. Fit the spare wheel with the valve stem
outwards and lightly tighten the wheel
nuts, ensuring they are firmly seated. DO
NOT fully tighten whilst the tire is clear of
H6291G the ground. See Directional tires, 239.

Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel nut WARNING


brace to slacken the wheel nuts half a turn When fitting a wheel, ensure that the mating
counter-clockwise. faces of the hub and wheel are clean and free
Attach the jack cranking lever to the jack. Fit the from rust or anti-seize compound - any
wheel nut brace onto the end of the cranking accumulation of dirt or rust could cause the
lever. wheel nuts to become loose.

264
R

Wheel Changing
6. Ensure that the space under and around the Compact spare wheel
vehicle is free from obstructions then lower
the vehicle and remove the jack and wheel WARNING
chocks. The following precautions must be observed
when the compact spare wheel is in use:
7. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in an
alternating pattern until all are tightened. • The compact spare wheel is for
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN by using foot TEMPORARY use only. It MUST be
pressure or extension bars on the wheel replaced by a normal-sized wheel and tire
nut brace, as this could overstress the as soon as possible.
wheel nuts. Check the wheel nut torque at • Only ONE compact spare wheel is to be
the earliest opportunity. used on the vehicle at any one time.
• DO NOT drive at a speed exceeding
Road wheel nut 140 Nm (± 10 Nm) 80 km/h (50 mph).
torque to hub
• The tire pressure in the compact spare
wheel/tire should be as detailed in the
8. Using a suitable blunt tool, apply light tire pressures table. See WHEELS AND
pressure to the rear of the displaced wheel TIRES, 296.
center cap and remove. Using hand
pressure only, fit the center cap into the • The compact spare tire has a shorter life
newly fitted wheel. Return tools, chocks, than a regular tire. Replace the tire with
jack and the displaced wheel to their one of the same type and specification.
correct storage positions. • The use of snow chains is not permitted
9. REMEMBER to change to H (HIGH) range on a compact spare wheel.
before driving. • DRIVE CAUTIOUSLY; the compact spare
10. Finally, check the tire pressure at the wheel tire is smaller in size and higher in
earliest opportunity. See WHEELS AND pressure than a regular tire. It will cause
TIRES, 296. a harsher ride and may provide less
traction on some road surfaces. If driving
Note: During jacking, the air suspension off-road on a compact spare wheel, drive
system may enter an automatic freeze state. with extra caution.
See Suspension freeze, 189.

265
L

Wheel Changing
Stowing the changed wheel

WARNING
DO NOT stow the wheel while the vehicle is
still raised on the jack.

1. Place the wheel under the rear of the


vehicle with its style surface uppermost.
2. Place the lifting lug through the wheel
aperture and locate it in position.
3. Winch up the wheel using the wheel-hoist
mechanism.
The mechanism has been designed for use
with the wheel nut brace. DO NOT use
power tools on the wheel-hoist winch.
4. Continue to wind up until the mechanism
clutches out. This is confirmed by a clear
physical feedback from the wheel nut brace
and an audible noise.
5. Check that the wheel has returned to the
same position as the spare wheel removed
previously. If in any doubt, unwind the
winch slightly and repeat the previous step.

WARNING
The wheel must be securely retained in its
correct position by the winch mechanism or it
could become loose.

6. Replace the circular cap over the


wheel-hoist nut. As the underside of this H6573G
cap is exposed to the same conditions as
the underside of the vehicle, ensure that it Caution: DO NOT stow 20 inch wheel and tire
is firmly in place. assemblies under the vehicle, as this may
result in damage to the wheel face.
7. Place the tools back into their stowage
location. Note: If, for any reason, the spare wheel is not
to be fitted back under the vehicle, the wheel
hoist should be rewound as follows.
Position the lifting lug level on the cable and
wind up the wheel hoist mechanism until it
clutches out.

266
R

Emergency Starting
Emergency Starting

STARTING AN ENGINE WITH A Boosting from another vehicle


DISCHARGED BATTERY If a donor vehicle is to be used, both vehicles
should be parked with their battery locations
Caution: DO NOT push or tow start.
adjacent to each other. Ensure that the two
Using booster cables vehicles do not touch.
Using booster cables (jump leads) from a Apply the parkbrakes and ensure that the
donor battery, or a battery fitted to a donor transmission of both vehicles is set in neutral
vehicle, is the only approved method of starting (P or Park).
a vehicle with a discharged battery. Turn off the starter switch and ALL electrical
WARNING equipment of BOTH vehicles.
Always wear eye protection when working WARNING
around batteries. DO NOT use a 24 volt booster start system.
During normal operation batteries emit These produce excessive voltage and can
explosive hydrogen gas - ensure sparks and damage the vehicles electrical system.
naked lights are kept away from the engine
compartment.
DO NOT attempt to start the vehicle if the
electrolyte in the battery is suspected of being
frozen.
Make sure BOTH batteries are of the same
voltage (12 volts), and that the booster cables
have insulated clamps and are approved for
use with 12 volt batteries.
DO NOT disconnect the discharged battery.
DO NOT connect positive (+) terminals to
negative (-) terminals, and ensure booster
cables are kept away from any moving parts
in the engine compartment.
Take care when working near rotating parts of
the engine.

267
L

Emergency Starting
Boosting procedure 4. On the disabled vehicle, connect the other
end of the BLACK booster cable to a good
earth point (e.g. an engine mounting or
other unpainted metal surface) at least
0.5m (20 in.) from the battery and well
+
away from fuel and brake lines.

WARNING
For safety reasons:
+
• DO NOT connect the black cable to the
negative terminal of the discharged
+ battery. If in doubt, seek qualified
assistance.
• ENSURE that each connection is securely
made and that there is no risk of the clips
accidentally slipping, or being pulled,
+ from the battery terminals. This could
cause sparking, which can lead to a fire
or explosion.

Check that the cables are clear of any moving


parts of both engines, then start the engine of
the donor vehicle and allow it to idle for a few
minutes.
H6293L
Now start the vehicle with the discharged
battery. Once both engines are running
Always adopt the following procedure,
normally, allow them to idle for two minutes
ensuring the cables are connected in the
before switching off the donor vehicle engine.
order shown below:
DO NOT switch on any electrical circuits on the
1. On the donor vehicle, connect one end of
previously disabled vehicle until AFTER the
the RED booster cable to the positive (+)
booster cables have been removed.
terminal of the battery or the vehicle’s
positive (+) connection point. Disconnecting the booster cables must be an
EXACT reversal of the procedure used to
2. On the disabled vehicle, connect the other
connect them, i.e. disconnect the BLACK cable
end of the RED booster cable to the positive
from the negative (-) connection on the donor
(+) battery terminal.
vehicle FIRST.
3. On the donor vehicle, connect one end of
the BLACK booster cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery or the vehicle’s
negative (-) connection point.

268
R

Fuses
Fuses

FUSES Engine compartment fuse box


Fuses are simple circuit devices which protect The engine compartment fuse box is located at
electrical equipment against the effects of the rear of the engine bay. To view the fuse box,
excess current. the under-hood cover will have to be removed.
See UNDER-HOOD COVERS, 220. The plastic
A blown fuse is indicated when the electrical
lid of the box is removed by pressing the plastic
equipment it protects becomes inoperative.
tabs in.
Fuses are colour coded to help identify their
amperage, as follows:
Blade fuse colours

VIOLET 3 amp
TAN 5 amp
BROWN 7.5 amp
RED 10 amp
BLUE 15 amp
YELLOW 20 amp
WHITE 25 amp
GREEN 30 amp

Cartridge fuse colours (engine bay only)

BLUE 20 amp
PINK 30 amp
H6300L
GREEN 40 amp
RED 50 amp Note: Fuse removal tweezers and spare blade
YELLOW 60 amp fuses are located in the passenger
compartment fuse box.
Note: Owners are advised against removing or
replacing the relays (identified as R1-R19 on
the relays) and fusible links (identified as
FL1-FL20 on the fusible links). Failure of any of
these items should be investigated by a
qualified technician.

269
L

Fuses
Engine compartment fuses

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5
F1 25 5 F2

F3 5 25 F4
A F1 F2
FL1 FL2 FL3
25A 5A F5 F6
50A 30A 30A 10 15
F3 F4

FL4
B FL5 FL6
5A 25A
F7 25 25 F8
50A 30A F5 F6
10A 15A
10 10
F9 15 15 F10
F7 F8 10 10

R6 R7
10 10
25A 25A
10 10